Pioneer HTP-330 Operating Instructions
HTP-330 S-ST330 SX-SW330 Operating Instructions Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer Speaker System HTP-330.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear , and 5 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference. HTP-330.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Contents 3 En English Contents 01 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Front surround setup (recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wall mounting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Before mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connecting up Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Using this system for TV audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 03 Controls and displays Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 14 04 Getting started System demo setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 05 Listening to your system Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Enhancing dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . . 18 Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 06 Listening to the radio Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Changing the frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 07 Surround sound settings Using the Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone . . . . 22 08 Other connections Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . . 23 Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . . 24 SR Setup for Pioneer plasma displays . . . . . . . . . 24 Using the SR mode with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 About control out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 09 Additional information Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 DTS CD setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using the TV remote control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following items are all supplied. Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW330) box: ⢠Remote control (page 13) ⢠AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2 (page 14) ⢠Display unit (page 12) ⢠Power cords x2 (page 11) ⢠AM loop antenna (page 9) ⢠FM wire antenna (page 9) ⢠Display cable (page 9) ⢠Coaxial cable (page 23) ⢠Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 15) ⢠Non-skid pads (large) x4 ( page 5, 6) ⢠Spacers x2 (page 9) ⢠This operating instructions Speakers (S-ST330) box: ⢠Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x2) (page 9) ⢠Speaker cables x5 (page 9) ⢠Non-skid pads (small) x24 ( page 5, 6) ⢠Brackets x2 ( page 5, 6) ⢠Spiral wrap x2 (page 10) ⢠Screws x8 (page 5, 6) HTP-330.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 4 En Chapter 1 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing the speakers. If the speakers are to be used in a stacked configuration, always use the provided brackets to secure them together (page 5, 6). Home theater sound setup Most 5.1 channel home theater systems are designed so that speakers are placed to surround the listenerâÂÂs position as shown in the illustration. Such designs, however, produce the undesirable effect of forcing the center speaker to be mounted above or below the television monitor, and require room for the surround speakers. The present system, however, features PioneerâÂÂs proprietary New Front Surround technology and Dual Center Speakers, using only two speaker positions (to right and left of television as shown in the illustration) in order to provide full home theater sound while greatly simplifying the issue of speaker placement. Front surround setup (recommended) This recommended method places the surround speakers in front, to simplify the issue of speaker placement in the room. The center speakers can be placed in independently in the center if desired. Center Center Front left Front left Front right Front right Surround left Surround left Surround right Surround right Bass Bass Center Center Front left Front left Front right Front right Surround left Surround left Surround right Surround right Bass Bass *When center speakers are placed in the center . Surround left Center Front left Listening position Listening position Center Front right Su rround right Receiver subwoofer Surround left Center Front left Front right Su rround right HTP-330.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 5 En English 1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of each of the front, center and surround speakers. The four large non-skid pads are for the receiver subwoofer (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker. 2 Stack the speakers and fix with the brackets. Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on the model label on the rear side to assist identification. Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers correctly. As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers from the bottom up in the order front speaker, center speaker, surround speaker. Align the bracket with the respective upper screw hole on the back of the front speaker, the two screw holes on the center speaker, and the bottom screw hole on the surround speaker, and fasten the screws securely. When placing the center speakers independently, stack the front speaker on the bottom and the surround speaker on top, then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes from the top of the bracket with the upper screw holes on the back of the speakers, and fasten the two securely. Caution ⢠Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped. 3 Connect the speaker system. Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 15) to complete your surround sound setup. Front, Center and Surround speakers Non-skid pads (small) x 24 Receiver subwoof er Non-skid pads (large) x 4 Front speaker Color indicator Model label Center speaker Surround speaker Left Blue White Green Gray Red Green Right Surround speaker Bracket Screw Center speaker Front speaker Bracket Screw Surround speaker Front speaker HTP-330.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 6 En Standard surround setup This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. The center speakers can be installed independently in the center if desired. 1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of each of the front, center and surround speakers. The four large non-skid pads are for the receiver subwoofer (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker. 2 (When mounting center speakers to right and left) Stack the speakers and fix with the bracket. Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on the model label on the rear side to assist identification. Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers correctly. As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers with the front speaker on the bottom and center speaker on top, then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes from the top of the bracket with the upper screw holes on the back of the speakers, and fasten the two securely. Caution ⢠Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped. 3 Connect the speaker system. Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 15) to complete your surround sound setup. Su rround left *When center speakers are placed in the center . Su rround right Center Center Front left Listening position Listening position Front right Receiver subwoofer Center Front left Front right Front, Center and Surround speakers Non-skid pads (small) x 24 Receiver subwoof er Non-skid pads (large) x 4 Front speaker Center speaker Left Green White Green Red Right Color indicator Model label Bracket Screw Center speaker Front speaker HTP-330.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 7 En English Wall mounting the speakers The front, center and surround speakers have a mounting hole which can be used to mount the speaker on the wall. Before mounting ⢠Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to mount the speakers on is strong enough to support them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls. ⢠Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws suitable for the wall material and support the weight of the speaker. Caution ⢠If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the wall, consult a professional for advice. ⢠Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or damage that result from improper installation. Additional notes on speaker placement ⢠Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV. ⢠When using the Front surround setup, separate the left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum effect. ⢠When using the Standard surround setup, install the surround speakers slightly above ear level for optimum effect. Precautions: ⢠When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV due to external shocks such as earthquakes, endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker. ⢠The front (x2), center (x2) and surround (x2) speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, depending on the installation location, color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this happens, turn the power switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker system away from the television set. ⢠The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor. Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close to the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Do not attach the receiver subwoofer to the wall or ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury. ⢠For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals. ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. 5 mm to 7 mm 5 mm 10 mm HTP-330.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 8 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Basic connections Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket. Note ⢠When using the display unit in a wall-mounted location, take full precautions to prevent the unit from accidentally falling. ⢠Screws and other fixtures for use in wall mounting are not included. WARNING ⢠Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents resulting from faulty assembly or installation, insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural disasters. MC ACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLA Y UNIT. SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDI O INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L AM loop antenna Display unit Receiver subw oofer 2 Display cable FM antenna 1 3 HTP-330.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 9 En English 1 Fasten the spacers to the display unit and connect. If the display unit is difficult to view, the spacers can be attached to allow changing of the viewing angle. Peel off the protective paper from the spacers and press the spacers onto the depressions on the bottom of the display unit. Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack on the receiver subwoofer. 2 Assemble the AM loop antenna. a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow. b. Clip the loop onto the stand. c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform step b after first securing the stand with screws. It is recommended that you determine the reception strength before securing the stand with the screws. 3 Connect the AM and FM antennas 1 . a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal 2 . For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; insert the wire, then release to secure. b. Push the FM antenna 3 plug onto the center pin of the FM antenna socket. 4 Connect each speaker. ⢠The front and surround speaker cables have a color- coded connector at one end and two bare wires at the other end. ⢠Since there is only one terminal to connect the two center speakers, you will need to use the supplied Y- cable for the connection. ⢠Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. ⢠Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the illustration can be identified by means of the color- coded indicator provided on the rear-surface model label. Match the color-coded wire with the color indicator on the model label, then insert the color- coded wire into the red ( ) side and the other wire into the black ( â ) side. ⢠When connecting the center speakers, connect the Y- cable dual end to the two center speakers in the same way. Note 1⢠Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit and receiver subwoofer. ⢠If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 19 or Connecting external antennas on page 23. ⢠Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 23. 2⢠DonâÂÂt let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. ⢠If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal. ⢠For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna. 3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit. a b c 2 1 Color-coded wire (Connect to speaker) Color-coded connector (Connect to rear panel) Y-cable To Receiver subwoofer HTP-330.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 10 En ⢠Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make sure to insert completely. The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug should face up or down depending on whether itâÂÂs being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly. ⢠When connections are completed, adjust the cable placements. If the speakers have been fixed with the brackets, fix the cable to the groove in the brackets as shown. ⢠Fasten the cables together with the spiral wrap. Hold multiple cables together and place the wrap over the cables from the end. Wrap the spiral wrap with the cables in the center. The spiral wrap may be cut at a desired length. 5 Connect the subwoofer cable. ⢠Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of center, you should see the subwoofer connecting cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER terminal. Caution ⢠These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. CON TROL OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC 7 To AC outlet Y-cable Receiver subw oofer 5 4 Speaker system Front right (Red) Center (Green) Surround right (Gray) Front left ( White) Center (Green) Surround left (Blue) Listening position Upper terminal Lower t erminal HTP-330.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 11 En English ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠The center speakers and front/surround speakers are designed with different impedance values. Be sure to identify and connect the speakers correctly since improper connections may result in degraded sound or operation. 6 If you have a DVD player or other source 1 component you want to connect, connect it now before connecting the power cord in the next step. See Connecting auxiliary components on page 23 for how to connect a digital source component. 7 Connect the power cord. 2 ⢠Connect the power cord to AC inlet on the receiver subwoofer. Connect the power cord to a wall socket. Using this system for TV audio If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to this system and enjoy surround TV sound. Important ⢠When connecting this system, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. Connect the power cord to the wall socket only after completing all other connections. 1 Connect the audio output jacks on your TV to the ANALOG input jacks on the receiver subwoofer. Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for this connection. Make sure you match the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. ⢠You can use the ANALOG input jacks for any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc. Note 1 Make sure to connect a TV or monitor (for video sources) to take advantage of this systemâÂÂs home theater potential. Please refer to the instruction manual supplied with your TV or monitor for connection details. 2⢠Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system. ⢠Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system. To Audio output 1 SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTRO L IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUD IO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC TV DVR 2 TICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) ITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG R L HTP-330.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 12 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Display unit 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the system on/into standby. 2 Front panel display See below for details. 3 IR remote sensor (page 14) 4 AUDIO INPUT (page 23) Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs ( DVD/DVR1 , DVD/DVR2 , DIGITAL or ANALOG ). 5 SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 16). 6 VOLUME buttons Use to adjust the volume. Display 1 DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 16). 2 F.SURR. Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround Advance listening modes is selected (page 17). SURR. Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 17). 3 SOUND Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 17). 4 Tuner indicators (page 19) â Lights when a broadcast is being received. â Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode. â Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 5 kHz / MHz Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character display ( kHz for AM, MHz for FM). 6 Character display 7 Lights when sleep timer is active (page 26). 8 2 PL II Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 16). 9 2 D Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 16). 1 4 6 5 2 3 2 PL 2 D kHz MHz SOUND DTS F .SURR. 5 4 2 3 7 8 9 6 1 HTP-330.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 13 En English Remote control 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into standby. 2 MUTE Press to mute all audio from the speakers. Press again to cancel and restore the sound. 3 VOLUME /â Use to adjust the volume. 4 Input select buttons DVD/DVR1 â Press to select the DVD/DVR1 digital audio input. DVD/DVR2 â Press to select the DVD/DVR2 digital audio input. DIGITAL â Press to select the DIGITAL audio input. ANALOG â Press to select the ANALOG audio input. (page 23) FM/AM â Press to select the built-in radio tuner. (page 19) 5 Number buttons, CLEAR and ENTER Use the number buttons for entering radio stations directly, and so on. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. Use ENTER to confirm an entry. 6 SLEEP Press to set the sleep timer (page 26). 7 SETUP Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup, tuner settings and so on (page 15, 19, 20, 21, 26). 8 SR Use to setup the SR features and to select the SR mode (page 25). 9 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate the receiver subwoofer menus. 10 SOUND (page 18) Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust bass and treble, etc. 11 TEST TONE Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 22). 12 SOUND RETRIEVER Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed stereo audio sources (page 17). 13 SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 16). 14 ADVANCED Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode (page 17). 15 F.S.SURR Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 17). 16 MCACC Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 15). 17 TV CONTROL (page 27) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. TV CONTROL ST ANDBY/ON VOL UME MUTE TEST TONE SOUND SOUND RETRIEVER SURROUND CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT TV AD V ANCED F .S .SU RR MCACC SLEEP SETUP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST FM/AM D VD/D VR1 D VD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ENTER ENTER CLEAR RE CE IV ER RECEIVER 1 2 3 6 8 13 12 7 9 11 10 5 16 14 15 17 4 HTP-330.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 14 En Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit, as shown. Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Caution Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of battery together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. WARNING ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. 30 30 7 m HTP-330.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 15 En English Chapter 4 Getting started System demo setting Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this starts when you plug in for the first time). 1S witch the system into standby. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DEMO from the menu, then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER . Select from: ⢠DEMO ON â Switches the demo display on. ⢠DEMO OFF â Switches the demo display off and the system into standby. Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided, the system uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration EQ) for your particular room. 1 Important ⢠The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; however, do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub-optimal setup. ⢠Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup. 1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the rear panel. 2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position. Place the mic horizontally about ear level at your normal listening position using a table or chair. Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. 3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press î STANDBY/ ON to turn the power on. 4 Press MCACC . Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC . The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones. ⢠To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, press MCACC . The unit will continue to use the previous settings. ⢠If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in the display for five seconds. To exit and check the noise levels 2 , press MCACC , or to try again, press ENTER when RETRY shows in the display. ⢠If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the display, there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER when you see RETRY . 3 When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level returns to normal, COMPLETE 4 shows in the display, and Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated. 5 Note 1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout). ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP 2⢠If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. ⢠Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup. 3 If this doesnâÂÂt work, press MCACC , turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again. 4 If COMPLETE doesnâÂÂt appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again. 5 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 18 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ. V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE D VD/D VR1 DVD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ST ANDBY/ON TV INPUT CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOL U ME MCACC MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTRO L IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MC ACC SETUP MIC HTP-330.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 16 En Chapter 5 Listening to your system Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. If you set up the system for Front surround (page 4), the Front Surround modes will give the best results (see Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 17). ⢠Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening mode. If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D or DTS indicator lights. ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. Listening in surround sound You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes. If you set up the system for Front surround (page 4), the Front Surround modes will give the best results (see Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 17). ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode. ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D or DTS indicator lights. ⢠AUTO â Auto listening mode (see above) ⢠DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source ⢠MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources, for use with any two-channel source ⢠MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below ⢠STEREO â See Listening in stereo on page 17 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. 1W ith Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press SOUND . 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or PANORAMA then press ENTER . ⢠C WIDTH (Center Width) â Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings) ⢠DIMEN. (Dimension) â Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings) ⢠PANORAMA â Extends the front strereo image to include the surround speakers for a âÂÂwraparoundâ effect. 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 17 En English Using Front Stage Surround Advance The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as described on page 4. ⢠Press F.S.SURR to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode. Press repeatedly to select FOCUS5.1 , WIDE5.1 or EXTRAPWR . ⢠FOCUS5.1 â Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center area where the left and right speakersâ sound projection converges. ⢠WIDE5.1 â Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS5.1 mode. ⢠EXTRAPWR â Outputs stereo sound (in the case of multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound) from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect. Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects. These modes are designed to provide optimum listening effect when using the Standard surround setup described on page 6. ⢠Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select: ⢠ACTION â Suitable for action movies ⢠UNPLUGED â Suitable for acoustic musical sources ⢠EXPANDED â Wide sound field ⢠TV SURR. â Surround sound for mono or stereo TV broadcasts ⢠SPORTS â Suitable for sports programming ⢠ADV.GAME â Suitable for TV game units ⢠VIRTUAL â A virtual surround effect using just the subwoofer and front speakers. ⢠X-STEREO â Powerful surround sound for stereo music sources Listening in stereo You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannelâÂÂin stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display. ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. Using the Sound Retriever When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression. â¢W hile listening to a stereo source, press SOUND RETRIEVER . Press repeatedly to switch between: ⢠RTRV ON â Switches the Sound Retriever on. ⢠RTRV OFF â Switches the Sound Retriever off. ST TUNE ST ENTER TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME F. S . SURR ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME ADV ANCED ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SOUND RETRIEVER HTP-330.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 18 En Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound on page 15. 1 Press SOUND . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select MCACC EQ then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and speaker settings (channel delay and channel level) remains as it is set. ⢠Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used. Enhancing dialogue The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie sound track. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DIALOGUE then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the amount dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm. Select between OFF , MID or MAX . Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source. The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select TONE then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select QUIET or MIDNIGHT then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes, select BASS/TRE . Adjusting the bass and treble Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select TONE then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select BASS/TRE then press ENTER. ⢠Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the same time. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select BASS or TREBLE; use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm. Boosting the bass level There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the bass in a source. 1 Press SOUND . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select BASSMODE then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the sound then press ENTER to confirm. Select between OFF , MUSIC or CINEMA . ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 19 En English Chapter 6 Listening to the radio Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen. 1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band. The display shows the band and frequency. 2 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modes â manual, auto, and high- speed: ⢠Manual tuning â Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching. ⢠High-speed tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving poor FM reception If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. 1 Tune to an FM radio station then press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose FM MODE then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select FM MONO then press ENTER . The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Improving poor AM sound The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off. Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna. Changing the noise cut mode If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best. 1 Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose NOISECUT then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER . Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Tune to an FM or AM radio station. Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved along with the preset. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose ST.MEM. then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the station preset you want then press ENTER . Listening to station presets 1M ake sure the tuner function is selected. 2 Use the ST /â buttons to select a station preset. ⢠Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a preset directly. ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TON E SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR D VD/DVR1 D VD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP FM/AM HTP-330.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 20 En Changing the frequency step If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/ region. 1S witch the system into standby. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂAM 9K/10KâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠AM 9K â 9 kHz step for AM; 50 kHz step for FM ⢠AM 10K â 10 kHz step for AM; 100 kHz step for FM HTP-330.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 21 En English Chapter 7 Surround sound settings Using the Setup menu From the Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system 1 , including channel levels, speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual mono audio playback. Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu. Channel level setting The Auto MCACC feature (see page 15) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo playback are independent of the settings for surround sound playback. A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 22 for more on this. 1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a source. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select CH LEVEL , then press ENTER . 4 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select a channel; îÂÂ/ î (cursor up/down) to adjust the level of that channel. ⢠You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. ⢠If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels. 5 Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Speaker distance setting The Auto MCACC feature (see page 15) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position. 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DISTANCE, then press ENTER . 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select a speaker; îÂÂ/ î (cursor up/down) to adjust the distance. Adjust the following speakers: ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠SR â Surround right speaker ⢠SL â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3 m to 9.0 m . 4 Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Dynamic Range Control When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low volume, low level sounds â including some of the dialogue â can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks. 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DRC, then press ENTER . Note 1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 19 and Additional information on page 26. ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 22 En 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠DRC OFF (default) â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) ⢠DRC MID â Mid setting ⢠DRC HIGH â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) 4 Press ENTER to exit. Dual mono setting Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with bilingual audio. 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DUALMONO, then press ENTER . 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠CH1 MONO (default) â Only channel 1 is played ⢠CH2 MONO â Only channel 2 is played ⢠CH1/CH2 â Both channels are played through the front speakers 4 Press ENTER to exit. Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see Channel level setting on page 21). A test tone is played through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the level as it plays. Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources are independent of the settings for surround sound sources. 1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening mode. ⢠If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two channel) playback, select the STEREO listening mode. 2 Press TEST TONE . The test tone is output from each speaker in turn. 3W hile a test tone is playing, use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust that channel level. The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. ⢠You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the VOLUME /â buttons (this does not affect the channel level settings). ⢠If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels. ⢠Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source. See the method described in Channel level setting on page 21. 4W hen youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to exit test tone setup. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOLUME SR ST TUNE TUNE ENTER TEST TONE SURROUND HTP-330.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 23 En English Chapter 8 Other connections Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket. Connecting auxiliary components The receiver subwoofer has several digital inputs for digital playback components, such as DVD, CD and MD players. ⢠Connect the digital output jack on your DVD player, etc. to one of the DIGITAL input jacks on the receiver subwoofer. Use a commercially available optical cable or supplied coaxial cable to make this connection. Connecting an analog audio component You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an analog audio component, such as a tape player. See Using this system for TV audio on page 11 for connection details (this explains connecting the audio output from your TV, but any analog audio component can be connected). Listening to an external audio source You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system. Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog sources include your TV. See also Connecting auxiliary components above. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ ON to switch on. Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on. 2 Select DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG to select the source for playback. These buttons correspond with the input jacks on the receiver subwoofer. 3 If necessary, start playback of the external source. Connecting external antennas For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl- insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the loop antenna connected. For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna. SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 MC ACC SETUP MIC DVD player , etc. To digital audio output (coaxial) To digital audio output (optical) or DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE FM/AM ST ANDBY/ON D VD/DVR1 DVD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CO NTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 Outdoor antenna external FM antenna external AM antenna Loop antenna P AL connector (5 m to 6 m) Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated Wire) HTP-330.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 24 En Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display If you have a Pioneer plasma display 1 , you can use an SR cable 2 to connect it to this unit and take advantage of various convenient features, such as controlling this unit via the plasma displayâÂÂs remote sensor, automatic video input switching of the plasma display, display unit messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and automatic volume muting on the plasma display. Important ⢠With an SR cable connected, the remote must now be pointed towards your plasma display rather than the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to control the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR cable to connect the CONTROL IN jack of this unit to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display. 3 Before you can use the extra SR features, you need to make a few settings in the unit â see SR Setup for Pioneer plasma displays below. SR Setup for Pioneer plasma displays Make the following settings if you have connected a Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR cable. 1 Press SR . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose SETUP, then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the setting. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings. 6 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the SR setup menu. Automatic plasma display volume muting When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwooferâÂÂs input function is changed to one that you would want to hear the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than the plasma display (DVD, for example). ⢠VOL.C ON â When this unit is switched on, or the input function is changed, the volume on the plasma display is muted so only sound from this unit is heard. ⢠VOL.C OFF â This unit does not control the volume of the plasma display Note 1 This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward. 2 The 3-ringed SR cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR cable. 3 You wonâÂÂt be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isnâÂÂt switched off. SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN CON TROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL A UDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC Pioneer plasma display CONTROL IN CONTROL OUT ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SR HTP-330.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 25 En English Automatic plasma display input switching In order that the plasma display can switch automatically to the correct input when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your system is connected. For example, if you connected your DVD player to the DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2 on your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here so that when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer to DV1 to watch your DVD player, the plasma display will automatically switch to input 2. For each receiver subwoofer input function ( DV1 (DVD/ DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA (ANALOG)) you can select: ⢠NONE â does not switch the plasma display input ⢠PDP1 to PDP7 â switches the plasma display input to one of the numbered inputs. (Note that the number displayed may vary depending on the plasma display to which you connect this unit.) ⢠TVTN â switches the plasma display to its built-in TV tuner Note ⢠Note that certain PDP inputs (ex. PDP7 ) may be referred to on your plasma display as âÂÂPC InputâÂÂ. ⢠The SR setting remains in effect even in standby. ⢠The SR setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner function. Using the SR mode with a Pioneer plasma display 1 Press SR on the remote. 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select SR ON then press ENTER. ⢠The SR setting is maintained even after switching the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on. Automatic muting and input switching will be effective when the receiver subwoofer is switched on. ⢠If you disconnect the SR cable or switch the plasma display off while SR is on, the SR ON setting remains. ⢠To switch to SR OFF , follow steps 1 and 2 , selecting SR OFF . Note ⢠You can control this unit with the plasma displayâÂÂs remote sensor even in standby, but you canâÂÂt control this unit with either this unitâÂÂs remote sensor or the plasma displayâÂÂs remote sensor when the plasma display is switched off (AC off) and the SR cable is connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit. About control out connections Many Pioneer components support SR CONTROL connections, by which you can use the remote controls of any connected components by aiming them at the sensor of just one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component. If you choose to use this feature, you must make sure that you also have at least one set of analog or coaxial digital audio jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes. ⢠Using a cable with mono mini-plugs on either side (sold separately), connect the CONTROL IN jack on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT jack on the receiver subwoofer. This will allow you to control the other component (such as a DVD recorder in a cabinet) by pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this receiver subwoofer. ⢠You can also connect this receiver subwoofer to your plasma display as described above, in which case you should point the remote at the plasma display to control your DVD player, receiver subwoofer, and plasma display. HTP-330.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 26 En Chapter 9 Additional information Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. 1 1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option. Choose between the following options: ⢠SLP ON â Switches off after about an hour ⢠SLP OFF â Cancels the sleep timer After selecting SLP ON , you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left. Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes (remaining): Dimming the display You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright. 2 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DIMMER then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select LIGHT or DARK then press ENTER . DTS CD setting If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change this setting to hear the decoded signal. 1S witch the system into standby. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select CD TYPE from the menu, then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER . Select from: ⢠NORMAL â Use for playback of regular audio CDs. Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when played. ⢠DTS-CD â Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be skipped. Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default. 1S witch the system on. 2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the î STANDBY/ON button on the display unit. The next time you switch on, all the system settings should be reset. Note 1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. 2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting. ST TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SLEEP SR SLEEP SL P --- -- ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 27 En English Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack . DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the system unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unitâÂÂs feet. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page. 1 Switch on your TV. 2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 3 Point the remote towards your TV and press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 2 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND V OLUME SETUP TEST TON E CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC AD V ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOL UME SR FM/AM D VD/DVR1 D VD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT CHANNEL VOL UME HTP-330.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 28 En Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656, 668 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646, 669, 670 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627, 667 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIDEN 671 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 HTP-330.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 29 En English Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. ⢠For audio-related problems, please also check the settings of the audio playback device. See the operating instructions for the device for detailed information. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on, or switches off suddenly (an error message may be displayed at startup). ⢠Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on. ⢠Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. ⢠Check that the speakers are connected correctly. ⢠Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model. ⢠Try reducing the volume level. ⢠If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. No sound is output when an input function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 23). ⢠Turn up the volume. ⢠Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off. No sound from surround or center speakers. ⢠Refer to Channel level setting on page 21 to check the speaker levels. ⢠Check that you havenâÂÂt selected the AUTO , STEREO , or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 16). ⢠Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up). CanâÂÂt operate using the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries ( Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 14). ⢠Operate within 7 m, 30ð of the remote sensor ( Using the remote control on page 14). ⢠Remove any obstacles or operate from another position . ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. ⢠F or operating the other P ioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this receiver subwoofer , make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable or at least one set of analog audio cables are connected. (page 25) ⢠If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a P ioneer plasma display with an SR cable, check that the plasma display is switched on. P oint the remote control at the plasma display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer . ⢠Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack. HTP-330.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 30 En Tuner Error Messages Glossary Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up ) and adjust the direction and position for best reception. Y ou may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 23). ⢠F ully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. Y ou may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 23). ⢠T urn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away . ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your countr y or region. See Changing the frequency step on page 20 to switch the tuning inter val. Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. F or more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. Message Description 2CH ONL Y ⢠An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the current source is a multichannel source. 96K ⢠An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital. MUTING ⢠An operation is prohibited because the sound is muted (press MUTE ). EXIT ⢠Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity . NOISY ⢠Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully . ERR MIC ⢠An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly . ERR SP ⢠An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are not connected properly . EEP ERROR ⢠Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. NO SPTYP ⢠T r y switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a P ioneer authorized ser vice center or your dealer . Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. Dolby Pro Logic II A matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories that expands any two-channel source audio, such as CDs and TV broadcasts, to a five-channel playback (left/center/right/left surround/right surround), resulting in a surround experience. DTS A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by DTS that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. HTP-330.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 31 En English Specifications SX-SW330 Audio Multi-channal Receiver Subwoofer â¢A mplifier section RMS Power Output: Front, Center, Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 ⦠) Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 ⦠) â¢F M tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced â¢A M tuner section Frequency range With 9 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz With 10 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna ⢠Subwoofer section Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex floor type System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W â¢M iscellaneous Power requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W Dimensions . . . . . 200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 428 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg ⢠Accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) . . . . . . . . . 2 Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 This operating instructions S-ST330 Speaker system (Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speakers x2) ⢠Front/surround speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠Center speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Dimensions . . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠Accessories Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Non-skid pads (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Spiral wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Note ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. HTP-330.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_ChH 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm HTP-330.book Page 2 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
ç®é 3 ChH ä¸Âæ ç®é 01 æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå è¨Âç½®æÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æªæ½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ã¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® ï¼Â建è°使ç¨＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨åºå®Âæ¼çÂÂ丠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 åºå®Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 éÂÂæ¼æÂÂè²å¨æºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 æ¥締åºæŽ£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 使ç¨æ¤系統ä½Âçºé»è¦Âé³æÂÂ輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 03 æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 è£Âå ¥éÂÂæ§å¨é»池. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 04 éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂ你系統å±Â示è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æ . . . . . . . . . 15 05 使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 以ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂèÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 使ç¨åÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 使ç¨ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 å 強å°Âç½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 使ç¨ ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂå ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 調æ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 å éÂÂä½Âé³é³é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 06 æ¶è½廣æ æ¶è½廣æ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¹å FM æÂ¥æ¶ä¸Âè¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¹å AM é³æÂÂä¸Âä½³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 è¨Âæ¶éÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 07 ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 使ç¨ ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 使ç¨測試é³調æ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 08 å ¶ä»Âæ¥締é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³æÂÂä¾Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 å°Âæ¤è£Âç½®é£æÂ¥å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç SR è¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 å° SR 模å¼ÂèÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨æÂÂé Â使ç¨ . . . . . . . . . 25 éÂÂæ¼æ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 09 å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 DTS CD è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 éÂÂè¨Â系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 使ç¨é»è¦ÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂéµ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 é Âè¨Â代碼表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ä¸Âè¬ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 è©Âå½Â表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 è¦Âæ ¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 å è£Â箱堧容ç© è«Â確èªÂå è£Â箱堧æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  ç®çÂÂç©åÂÂã æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼ SX-SW330 ï¼Âå è£Â箱＠⢠éÂÂæ§å¨ ï¼Â第 13 é Â＠⢠AA/R6 ä¹¾é»池ï¼Â以便æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæ§å¨＠x2 ï¼Â第 14 é Â＠⢠顯示è£Âç½® ï¼Â第 12 é Â＠⢠é»æºÂç· x2 ï¼Â第 11 é Â＠⢠AM 迴路天締ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠顯示é£æ¥締ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠åÂÂ軸é»締ï¼Â第 23 é Â＠⢠麥å Â風 ï¼Âä¾Âèªå MCACC è¨Â置＠ï¼Â第 15 é Â＠⢠é²æ»Â墠ï¼Â大＠x4 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Â＠⢠å¢Âå¡ x2 ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠æ¾ÂÂä½Â說æ æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ S-ST330 ï¼Âå è£Â箱＠⢠æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½® x2 ãÂÂç°繠x2 ãÂÂä¸Âç½® x2 ï¼ ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠æÂÂè²å¨é£æ¥締x5 ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠é²æ»Â墠ï¼Âå°Âï¼ x24 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Â＠⢠æ¯æ¶ x2 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Â＠⢠çºÂç¹Â管 x2 ï¼Â第 10 é Â＠⢠èº絲 x8 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Âï¼ HTP-330.book Page 3 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 4 ChH 第 1 ç« æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå è¨Âç½®æÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æªæ½ çµÂè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨æ ＠è«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨平æ¾以å Âç¼çÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå· ãÂÂè« åÂÂå¿ å¨平穩çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂçµÂè£ÂãÂÂè¨Âç½®èÂÂæºæ¾ã å¦ÂæÂÂ使ç¨å ÂçÂÂçÂÂæºè¨Âæ¹å¼Â使ç¨æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠使ç¨é¨é çÂÂæ¯æ¶å°Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºå®Âå¨ä¸Âèµ· ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Âï¼ ã 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âç½® 大å¤Âæ¸ç 5.1 è²éÂÂ家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢系統æ¯éÂÂå°Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æºè¨Âå¨ å¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂç°ç¹ÂèÂÂè½è ä½Âç½®èÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂãÂÂéÂÂé¡Âè¨Âè¨ÂæÂÂ使è£Âå¨ é»è¦Âè¢å¹Âä¸Âæ¹æÂÂä¸Âæ¹çÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¢çÂÂä¸Âæ³è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ èÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæºè¨Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ空éÂÂã ç® Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂç³» çµ± Ã¥ÂÂè½ç¹ è²å æ¬ å ÂéÂÂç¹ æÂÂçÂÂæ° å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç° ç¹ æÂÂè¡Âè é éÂÂä¸Âç½® æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Âå 使ç¨ å ©åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示 çÂÂé»覠å³å´èÂÂå·¦å´＠æÂÂä¾Âå®Âæ´çÂÂ家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æ ＠åÂÂæÂÂ大幠æ¸Âå°Âæ è²å¨çÂÂæºè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âã åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® ï¼Â建è°使ç¨＠éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°æ¹æ³Âå°Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨æ¾å¨åÂÂé¢ ï¼ ç°¡åÂÂäºÂæÂÂè²å¨å¨æ¿ éÂÂä¸Âç æºè¨Âå é¡ÂãÂÂ丠置æÂÂè² å¨å¯以 è¦ÂéÂÂ覠å® ç¨æº訠å¨丠央ã ä¸Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å·¦ç°繠左ç°繠å³ç°繠å³ç°繠ä½Âé³ ä½Âé³ ä¸Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å·¦ç°繠左ç°繠å³ç°繠å³ç°繠ä½Âé³ ä½Âé³ * ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ¾å¨ä¸Â央ã 左ç°繠ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³ç°繠æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ å·¦ç°繠ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³ç°繠HTP-330.book Page 4 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 5 ChH ä¸Âæ 1 å°Âè¼Âå°ÂçÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âé»Âè²¼æ¼æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ã ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂåºÂé¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ大åÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âç¨æ¼æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ示＠ã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»Âæ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂ座 ï¼Âå¹³é¢＠ã 2 å ÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨並使ç¨æ¯æ¶åºå®Âã 毠åÂÂæÂÂè² å¨èÂÂé¢ ç åÂÂèÂÂ樠籤ä¸Âé½ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå© èÂÂå¥ç 顠è²編碼 æÂÂ示ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é¡Âè²æÂÂ示並æ£確å®Âè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã å¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示ï¼Âä¾ÂåºÂç±ä¸Âå¾Âä¸Âå ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè² å¨ãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂå°ÂæºÂæ¯æ¶èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨èÂÂé¢çÂÂä¸Âå´èº çµ²åÂÂãÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂå ©åÂÂèº絲åÂÂãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂé¨èº çµ²åÂÂ並ç¢ç¢å°åºå®Âèº絲ã å®ç¨æºè¨Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨ä¸Âæ¹ ï¼Âç°繠æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨ä¸Âæ¹ ï¼ ç¶å¾Âå°ÂæºÂæ¯æ¶é Â端çÂÂ第 1 Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ第 3 å èº絲åÂÂèÂÂæÂÂè²å¨èÂÂé¨çÂÂä¸Âå´èº絲å ＠ç¶å¾Âç¢ç¢å°åºå®ÂéÂÂå © é¡Âèº絲ã 注æ â¢ 使ç¨æ¯æ¶é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠è«Âå¿ç¨æÂÂæ¿èÂÂå®Âå ãÂÂå¦åÂÂå¯ è½æÂÂå°Âè´æ¯æ¶æÂÂ壠ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè½æ´æÂÂé æÂÂæ¯æ¶åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨å´ éÂÂæÂÂå£Âã 3 æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç·Âã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æ¥締以便æ£確é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾ ï¼Âè«Âä¾Â砧丠åÂÂæÂÂ示å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂãÂÂå®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å¾Âï¼ è«Âå·è¡Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ( 第 15 é  ) ï¼Âå®ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂç è¨Âç½®ã åÂÂç½®ãÂÂä¸Âç½®ãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Âå°Âï¼ x 24 æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Â大＠x 4 Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ é¡Âè²æÂÂ示 Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤 ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ å·¦ èÂÂè² ç½è² 綠è² ç°è² ç´ è² 綠è² å³ ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ æ¯æ¶ èº絲 ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ æ¯æ¶ èº絲 ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ HTP-330.book Page 5 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 6 ChH æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® æ¤çºæ¨ÂæºÂå¤Âè²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½® ï¼ é©ç¨æ¼ 5.1 è²éÂÂç 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂã ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å¯以è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Âå®ç¨å®Âè£Âå¨ä¸Â央ä½Âç½®ã 1 å°Âè¼Âå°ÂçÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âé»Âè²¼æ¼æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ã ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂåºÂé¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ大åÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âç¨æ¼æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ示＠ã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»Âæ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂ座 ï¼Âå¹³é¢＠ã 2 ï¼Âå°Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨è£Âå¨å³å´ Ã¥ÂÂå·¦å´æÂÂï¼Âå ÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨並使 ç¨æ¯æ¶åºå®Âã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ è²å¨è é¢çÂÂå èÂÂæ¨Â籤 丠é½æÂÂå å©èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ çÂÂé¡Âè² 編碼 æÂÂ示ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é¡Âè²æÂÂ示並æ£確å®Âè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã å¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示 ï¼ å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨åºÂé¨ä¸Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨ ä¸Âæ¹ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°ÂæºÂæ¯æ¶é Â端çÂÂ第 1 Ã¥ÂÂ第 3 Ã¥ÂÂèº絲åÂÂèÂÂæÂÂè² å¨èÂÂé¨çÂÂä¸Âå´èº絲åÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¢ç¢å°åºå®ÂéÂÂå ©é¡Âèº絲ã 注æ â¢ 使ç¨æ¯æ¶é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠è«Âå¿ç¨æÂÂæ¿èÂÂå®Âå ãÂÂå¦åÂÂå¯ è½æÂÂå°Âè´æ¯æ¶æÂÂ壠ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè½æ´æÂÂé æÂÂæ¯æ¶åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨å´ éÂÂæÂÂå£Âã 3 æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç·Âã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æ¥締以便æ£確é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾ ï¼Âè«Âä¾Â砧丠åÂÂæÂÂ示å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂãÂÂå®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å¾Âï¼ è«Âå·è¡Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ( 第 15 é  ) ï¼Âå®ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂç è¨Âç½®ã 左ç°繠* ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ¾å¨ä¸Â央ã å³ç°繠ä¸Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® å³åÂÂç½® æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® Ã¥ÂÂç½®ãÂÂä¸Âç½®ãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Âå°Âï¼ x 24 æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Â大＠x 4 Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ å·¦ 綠è² ç½è² 綠è² ç´ è² å³ é¡Âè²æÂÂ示 Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤 æ¯æ¶ èº絲 ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ HTP-330.book Page 6 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 7 ChH ä¸Âæ å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨åºå®Âæ¼çÂÂ丠åÂÂç½® ã ä¸Âç½®åÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂåºå®Âå ï¼Âå¯ç¨æ¼å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨åº宠æ¼çÂÂä¸Âã åºå®Âå â¢ è«Âè¨Âä½Âï¼ÂæÂÂè²å¨系統éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âè¼Âï¼Âå¯è½使èº絲é¬Âè«æÂÂå çÂÂå£ÂæÂÂæÂÂç¡æ³Âæ¯æÂÂå ¶éÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂå°Âè´æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂè½ ãÂÂè«Â確 å®ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂçÂÂçÂÂå£Âå¯æ¯æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂè«Âå¿å®Âè£Âæ¼ 夾æ¿æÂÂæÂÂè»ÂçÂÂçÂÂå£Â表é¢ã â¢ 换åÂÂæªé¨éÂÂåºå®Âç¨çÂÂèº絲ã è«Â使ç¨é©åÂÂçÂÂå£ÂæÂÂæÂÂ並 å¯æ¯æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨éÂÂéÂÂçÂÂèº絲ã 注æ â¢ èÂ¥ä¸Â確å®ÂçÂÂå£ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質堠åºèÂÂå¦ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Âæ¥Â人å¡å°Âæ±Â建 è°ã â¢ å ÂéÂÂå°Âæ¼任 ä½ å ä¸Âç¶å®Â裠æ å¼Âèµ·ä¹ÂæÂÂå¤Âæ æ 害æ¦Â丠負責ã éÂÂæ¼æÂÂè²å¨æºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂ頠⢠å°Â主è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂå·¦å³æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨èÂÂé»è¦ÂçÂÂè·Âä¹ÂèÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½®æÂÂï¼Â使左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢素1.5 m 以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½®æÂÂï¼ è«Âå°Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨ç¨Â微髠æ¼è³æµçÂÂä½Â置以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã å®Âå ¨é Âç¥＠⢠å°Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âæ¼é»è¦Âä¸Âæ¹æ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠使ç¨è 帶æ 堶 ä»Âé©ç¶ ç 工 å · å° å ¶ åº å®ÂãÂÂå¦åÂÂæ è² å¨ å¯ è½ å çº夠åÂÂï¼Âå¦Âå°éÂÂèÂÂæÂÂè½ï¼Âå èÂÂå°Âé±éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é æÂÂå±éªæ æÂÂ害ã â¢ æ¤系統é¨éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½® ï¼ x2 ï¼ ãÂÂä¸Âç½® ï¼ x2 ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç°繠＠x2 ï¼ æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂé²ç£ÂèÂÂçÂÂãÂÂç¶èÂÂï¼Âè¦Âå®Âè£Âä½Âç½®ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂ¥ æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âä½Âç½®éÂÂæ¼æÂ¥è¿Âé»è¦Âè¢å¹Âï¼ åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂè² 彩失çÂÂç æ æ³Âã èÂÂ¥ ç¼çÂÂæ¤æ 泠＠è«Âå ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»覠橠é» æºÂï¼ 15 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂè³ 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå¾Âå¨éÂÂæ°éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥æ æ³Âä»Âæªæ¹ Ã¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨系統é é¢é»è¦Âæ©Âã â¢ æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³æªç¶ÂéÂÂé²ç£ÂèÂÂç ï¼Âå æ¤è«Âé¿å Âæ¾å¨é»è¦Âæ© æÂÂç£è¦Âå¨å¨å ãÂÂå«ç£Âæ§çÂÂå²åÂÂåªÂä»Âï¼Âå¦Âç£Âç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂéÂÂé³ 帶æÂÂéÂÂ影帶ï¼Âä¹ÂæÂÂé é¢æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ã â¢ è«Âå¿å°ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³å®Âè£Âæ¼çÂÂå£ÂæÂÂ天è±æ¿ã å¦åÂÂå¯è½æ è½並é æÂÂ人å¡åÂÂå·ã â¢ çºå®Â堨起è¦Âï¼ è«Â確å®ÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂå¤Âæ²ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âæªå è¦Âç æÂÂè²å¨é»ç·Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æ¥堶ä»Âæ´大å¨ ãÂÂå¦åÂÂå¯è½é æ æ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æ¥堶ä»Âæ¤系統å¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã 5 mm è³ 7 mm 5 mm 10 mm HTP-330.book Page 7 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 8 ChH 第 2 ç« æ¥締åºæŽ£æÂÂ¥ éÂÂ覠⢠å°Âæ¤系統é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®Âæ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂï¼Â並å°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã åÂÂ註 ⢠å¨çÂÂå£Âå®Âè£Âé¨ä½Âä¸Â使ç¨顯示å¨æÂÂï¼ è«Âæ¡åÂÂå®Âæ´çÂÂé Âé² æªæ½以é²è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂè½ã â¢ æ¬è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ並æª æ ä¾ÂçÂÂå£Âå®Â裠æ ç¨çÂÂèº絲åÂÂå ¶ ä» å®Âè£Â頠件ã è¦å â¢ å ÂéÂÂå° æ¼ ä»»ä½Âå é¯誤çµÂ裠æ å®Âè£Âã ç å£Âåºå®Â強度 丠足ãÂÂåºå®Âè£Âå ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â建æÂÂï¼ ãÂÂä¸Âç¶使ç¨æÂÂ天ç½æÂÂé æÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂå¤Âï¼Âæ¦Âä¸Â負責ã MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CO NTROL IN CO NTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLA Y UNIT. SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDI O INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L AM 迴路天締顯示è£Âç½® 2 顯示é£æ¥締FM 天締1 3 HTP-330.book Page 8 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 9 ChH ä¸Âæ 1 åºå®Â顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂå¢Âå¡Â並é£æÂ¥ã å¦ÂæÂÂå¾Âé£çÂÂå°顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂç«é¢ ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å®Âè£Âå¢Âå¡Â以è®Âæ´觠çÂÂè§Â度ã æÂÂä¸Âå¢Âå¡ÂçÂÂé²è·ç´Âï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°Âå¢Âå¡ÂæÂÂ堥顯示è£Â置庠é¨çÂÂå¹åÂÂå §ã å°Â顯示å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âç L Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂç·£æÂÂ堥顯示è£Âç½®å¾Âæ¹çÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼ ç¶ å¾Âå°Â顯示å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå¦ä¸Â端æÂÂå ¥æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç SYSTEM CONNECTOR æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 çµÂ裠AM 迴路天ç·Âã a. ä¾Âç®Âé ÂæÂÂ示æ¹åÂÂå½Âæ²æ¯æ¶ã b. å°Â迴路夾å¨æ¯æ¶ä¸Âã c. èÂ¥è¦Âåºå®Âå¨ç 壠æÂÂå ¶ä»Â表é¢ ä¸Âï¼Â堠以 èº絲åº å® æ¯ æ¶ å¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå·è¡Âæ¥驠b ã æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°æ¨以èº絲åºå®Âæ¯æ¶åÂÂï¼Âå Â確èªÂæÂ¥æ¶強度ã 3 é£æÂÂ¥ AM å FM 天締1 ã a. å° AM 迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âæ¢Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥å°æ¯Âå AM 天締端åÂÂ丠2 ã æÂÂä¸Âå¡èÂÂ便å¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ端åÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂå ¥é»ç·Âï¼Âé¬ÂéÂÂå¡è 便å¯å°Âé»ç·Â夾ä½Âåºå®Âã b. å° FM 天締3 æÂÂé Âæ¨堥 FM 天ç·ÂæÂÂ槽çÂÂä¸Â央æ¥蠳ã 4 é£æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂç½® å ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é£ æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Â丠端 é½æÂÂå«é¡Âè² 代 碼çÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼Âå¦ä¸Â端åÂÂæÂÂå ©æ¢Â裸ç·Âã â¢ ç±æ¼åªæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ端åÂÂå¯以é£æ¥堩åÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨＠å æ¤æ¨ å¿ é Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂç Y é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥ã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂ並æÂÂåºæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»ç·ÂçÂÂä¿Âè·層ã â¢ å°Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂÂè²å¨丠ãÂÂ使ç¨å¾Â表é¢åÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸ÂæÂÂä¾ çÂÂé¡Âè²代碼å¯以èÂÂå¥åÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ãÂÂæ¯Âå°Âé¡Âè² 代碼ç·ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸Âé¡Âè²æÂÂ示＠ç¶å¾Âå°Âé¡Âè²代碼ç·Âæ 堥素è² ï¼ ï¼Â端ï¼Âå¦ä¸Âæ¢Âç·ÂæÂÂå ¥é»Âè² ï¼ â ï¼Â端ã â¢ é£æÂ¥ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠使ç¨ç¸åÂÂæ¹å¼Âå° Y é£æÂ¥ç·ÂéÂÂéÂÂ端 é£æÂ¥å°堩åÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ã éÂÂ註 1 ⢠è«Âå°Â天ç·Âé é¢堶ä»Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂãÂÂ顯示è£Â置以åÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ã â¢ èÂ¥é¨éÂÂ天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥æ¶è¨ÂèÂÂä¸Âè¯ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 19 é Âç æ¹å FM æÂ¥æ¶ä¸Âè¯ 以å æ¹å AM é³æÂÂä¸Âä½³ ï¼ÂæÂÂ第 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締ã â¢ ä¸Âå¯å®Âè£Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂ迴路天ç·Â以å¤ÂçÂÂ天ç·Âï¼ÂæÂÂå¦Â第 23 é ÂæÂÂè¿°çÂÂå¤Âæ¥天ç·Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使天ç·Âæ¥觸éÂÂ屬ç©é«Âï¼Â並é¿å Âå°Âå ¶å®Âç½®å¨é»蠦ãÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂȌ¨ç¨åÂÂéÂÂè¿Âã â¢ èÂ¥ç¡ç·ÂéÂȾ¶è¨Âä¸Âè¯ï¼Âå¯éÂÂæ°å°Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âé»ç·Âè£Âè³ç¸åÂÂçÂÂ端åÂÂ以æ±Âæ¹åÂÂã â¢ çºéÂÂæÂÂä½³æ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Âå¿尠AM 迴路天ç·Âé»ç·ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âå ¶ç¹Âå¨迴路天ç·Âå¨åÂÂã 3 çº確ä¿ÂæÂÂä½³æ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Â確宠FM 天ç·Âå®Âå ¨å±ÂéÂÂï¼Âä¸ÂæªçºÂç¹ÂæÂÂæ¸æÂÂæ¼è£Âç½®å¾Âæ¹ã a b c 2 1 é¡Âè²代碼締ï¼Âé£æÂ¥å°æÂÂè²å¨＠é¡Âè²代碼æ¥頠ï¼Âé£æÂ¥å°å¾Âé¢æ¿＠Y é£æ¥締è³æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ HTP-330.book Page 9 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 10 ChH ⢠å°Âå¦ä¸Â端æÂÂ¥ 丠æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ å¾ æ¹æÂÂé¡Âè²代碼 ç æÂÂè²å¨ 端åÂÂãÂÂè«Â確å®Âå°Âé»ç·Âå®Âå ¨æÂÂå ¥ã æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂé Âé»ç·Â端çÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¹åÂÂçºæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âï¼ÂéÂÂ覠é»ç·ÂæÂÂå ¥ä¸Âæ¹æÂÂä¸Âæ¹æÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂèÂÂå®ÂãÂÂè«Â確å®Âæ¥締æ£確ã â¢ å®ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂÂï¼Â調æ´é£æÂ¥ç·Âä½Âç½®ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨以æ¯æ¶åº å®Âï¼Âè«Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âåºå®Âå¨æ¯æ¶çÂÂæºÂ槽ä¸Âã â¢ 使ç¨çºÂç¹Â管å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âåºå®Âå¨ä¸Âèµ·ã å°Âå¤Âæ¢Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âåºå®Âå¨ä¸Âèµ·ï¼ ç¶å¾Âå¾Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂæ«端éÂÂ姠å ä¸ÂçºÂç¹Â管ã å ä¸ÂçºÂç¹Â管ï¼Â並å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âæ¾å¨ä¸Â央ã çºÂç¹Â管å¯以åÂÂå²å°æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé·度ã 5 é£æÂ¥éÂÂä½Âé³æÂ¥ç·Âã â¢ éÂÂä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨æ£ä¸Âæ¹ï¼Âè³ä¸ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå·¦ï¼Âå°±æ¯éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé£ æ¥締ã è«Âå°Âæ¤é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂå ¥ SUBWOOFER SPEAKER 端 Ã¥ÂÂã 注æ â¢ éÂÂäºÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂå¯è½å« å±éªé»壠ãÂÂçºé¿å Âæ¼é£æÂ¥æÂÂæ é¤æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂç¼çÂÂ觸éÂȍÂÂå±éª＠æ¥觸任ä½ÂæªçµÂç·£ é¶件åÂÂï¼Âè«Âå ÂæÂÂé¤é»æºÂç·Âã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æÂ¥æ¤系統å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æ¤系統以å¤ÂçÂÂæ´大å¨ ãÂÂèÂ¥é£ æ¥堶ä»Âæ´大å¨å¯è½å°Âè´æ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ ä¸Âç½® æ è²å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½® î¿ ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨æ¯ 以 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂȾ å¼ è¨Â訠ã è«Â確å®Âæ£確èÂÂå¥èÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Âå çºä¸Âç¶çÂÂé£ æÂ¥æ¹å¼Âå¯è½å°Âè´è²é³æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè®Âå·®ã SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. CONTROL OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MC ACC SETUP MIC 7 è³ AC é»æºÂæÂÂ座 Y é£æ¥締5 4 æÂÂè²å¨系統 å³åÂÂç½® ï¼Âç´ è²＠ä¸Âç½® ï¼Â綠è²＠å³ç°繠ï¼Âç°è²＠左åÂÂç½® ï¼Âç½è²＠ä¸Âç½® ï¼Â綠è²＠左ç°繠ï¼ÂèÂÂè²＠èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® ä¸Âæ¹端å ä¸Âæ¹端å HTP-330.book Page 10 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 11 ChH ä¸Âæ 6 èÂ¥æÂÂå ¶ä»Âè¦Âé£æÂ¥ç DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨æÂÂå½±é³ä¾Â溠1 è£Âç½® ï¼ è« å Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ï¼Âç¨Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂã éÂÂæ¼é£æÂ¥æ¸ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂè£Âç½®çÂÂæ¹å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥é 屬è£Âç½® ã 7 æÂ¥ä¸Âé»æºÂç·Âã 2 ⢠å°Âé»æºÂç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç AC é»æºÂæÂÂå£ãÂÂå°Âé»溠ç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂå£Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã 使ç¨æ¤系統ä½Âçºé»è¦Âé³æÂÂ輸åº èÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼Â便å¯å°Âé»è¦ÂèÂÂæ¤系統é£æ¥＠享åÂÂé»è¦Âç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã éÂÂ覠⢠å°Âæ¤系統é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂï¼Â並å°Âé»æºÂç· æ é Âèªç 丠é» 溠æ 座 丠æÂÂé¤ãÂÂåªæ å¨ å® æ æ æ é£æÂÂ¥ å¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂå¯以å°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂå ¥çÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã 1 å°Âé»è¦Âä¸ÂçÂÂé³æÂÂ輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å°æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç ANALOG 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨素î¿ç½ ç«Âé«Âè² é³æÂÂé£ æ¥締ï¼Âæªé¨ éÂÂï¼Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ãÂÂ諠確å®Âå·²å°Âå·¦å³堩éÂÂ輸åºæÂ¥é Âè³ç¸æÂÂçÂÂ輸堥 ＠以便ç¢çÂÂæ£確 çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂã â¢ æ¨å¯以使ç¨ ANALOG 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å¡帶çÂÂä»»ä½Âé¡Â毠ä¾ÂæºÂã éÂÂ註 1 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ é£æÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨ ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè¦Âè¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼ ï¼Â以便ç¼æ®æ¤系統çÂÂ家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢åÂÂè½ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂå ï¼ÂäºÂ解é£æÂ¥çÂÂ詳細 è³Âè¨Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使ç¨æ¬系統é¨éÂÂ以å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âé»æºÂç·Âã â¢ é¤é£æÂ¥æ¬系統å¤Âï¼Âè«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂé»æºÂç·Âä½Âçº堶ä»Âç¨éÂÂ使ç¨ã è³é³æÂÂ輸åº端å 1 SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN CON TROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC é»è¦Âæ© DVR 2 TICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) ITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG R L HTP-330.book Page 11 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 12 ChH 第 3 ç« æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統é»æºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æ¿顯示 詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 3I R éÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Â第 14 é Âï¼ 4 AUDIO INPUT ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ åÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Âæ¤æÂÂéµ便å¯é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé¨é³æÂÂ輸堥＠DVD/ DVR1 ã DVD/DVR2 ã DIGITAL æ ANALOG ï¼ ã 5 SURROUND ç¨æ¼é¸åÂÂç°ç¹Â模张ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 6 VOLUME æÂÂéµ ç¨æ¼調æ´é³éÂÂã 顯示幠1 DTS æÂÂæ¾ DTS ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 2 F.SURR. é¸åÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種åÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã SURR. é¸åÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種å Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 3 SOUND è²é³修æ£å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 4 調諧å¨æÂÂ示ç ï¼Â第 19 é Âï¼ ï¼ æÂ¥æ¶廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã ＠å¨èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂ¥æ¶ç«Âé«Âè² FM 廣æÂÂæÂÂæ 亮起ã ＠é¸å FM å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶æÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 5 kHz/MHz 表示åÂÂå Â顯示å¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂé »çÂÂå®你＠kHz ç¨æ¼ AM ï¼ MHz ç¨ æ¼ FM ï¼ ã 6 Ã¥ÂÂå Â顯示幠7 æ¤çÂÂå¨ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 8 2 PL II æ¤çÂÂå¨ Dolby Pro Logic II 解碼æÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 9 2 D æ¤çÂÂå¨æÂÂæ¾ Dolby Digital ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 1 4 6 5 2 3 2 PL 2 D kHz MHz SOUND DTS F .SURR. 5 4 2 3 7 8 9 6 1 HTP-330.book Page 12 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 13 ChH ä¸Âæ éÂÂæ§å¨ 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³é»æºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 MUTE æÂÂä¸Âå¯使æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæÂÂé³æÂÂéÂÂé³ ã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次便å¯åÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂé³並 æ¢復é³æÂÂã 3 VOLUME /â ç¨æ¼調æ´é³éÂÂã 4 輸堥é¸æÂÂæÂÂéµ DVD/DVR1 ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ DVD/DVR1 æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸 å ¥ã DVD/DVR2 ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ DVD/DVR2 æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸 å ¥ã DIGITAL ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ DIGITAL é³æÂÂ輸堥ã ANALOG ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ ANALOG é³æÂÂ輸堥ã ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ FM/AM â æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂ堧建çÂÂç¡ç·Âé»調諧å¨ã ï¼Â第 19 é Âï¼ 5 æ¸åÂÂéµã CLEAR å ENTER 使ç¨æ¸åÂÂéµå¯ç´æ¥輸堥廣æÂÂéÂȌ°çÂÂã 使ç¨ CLEAR å¯渠é¤任ä½Â輸堥çÂÂ堧容並éÂÂæ°輸堥ã 使ç¨ ENTER 確èªÂ輸堥çÂÂ堧容ã 6 SLEEP æÂÂä¸Âå¯è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®Âæ ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 7 SETUP ç¨æ¼åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®系統 ＠以便é²è¡Âç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âç½® ã 調諧å¨è¨Âå® çÂÂ＠第 15 ï¼ 19 ï¼ 20 ï¼ 21 ï¼ 26 é Âï¼ ã 8 SR ç¨æ¼è¨Âå® SR Ã¥ÂÂè½並é¸æ SR 模张ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã 9 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ( 游æ¨ÂæÂÂéµ ) å ENTER ç¨æ¼å°Â覽æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³é¸å®ã 10 SOUND ï¼Â第 18 é Âï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é²堥é³æÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âé²èÂÂ調æ´ä½Âé³èÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂã 11 TEST TONE ç¨æ¼輸åº測試é³ ï¼Â以便é²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Â置＠ï¼Â第 22 é Âï¼ ã 12 SOUND RETRIEVER æÂÂä¸Âå¯尠CD Ã¥ÂÂ質é³æÂÂæ¢復æÂÂå£Â縮çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂä¾Â溠ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 13 SURROUND ç¨æ¼é¸åÂÂç°ç¹Â模张ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 14 ADVANCED ç¨æ¼é¸åÂÂå ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âç°ç¹Â模张ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 15 F.S.SURR ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 16 MCACC éÂÂå§Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ＠第 15 é Âï¼ ã 17 TV CONTROL ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ è¨Âå®Âå¾Âï¼Âå¯使ç¨éÂÂäºÂæ§å¶頠æ§å¶æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã TV CONTROL ST ANDBY/ON VOL UME MUTE TEST TONE SOUND SOUND RETRIEVER SURROUND CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT TV AD V ANCED F .S .SU RR MCACC SLEEP SETUP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST FM/AM D VD/D VR1 D VD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ENTER ENTER CLEAR RE CE IV ER RECEIVER 1 2 3 6 8 13 12 7 9 11 10 5 16 14 15 17 4 HTP-330.book Page 13 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 14 ChH 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ è¨Âä½Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂ頠＠⢠è«Â確å®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨èÂÂè£Âç½®ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨éÂÂç¡é»ç¤Âç©ã â¢ èÂ¥æÂÂå¼·å ÂæÂÂè¢å ÂçÂÂç §å°Âå¨è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ä¸Âï¼ åÂÂå¯ è½ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæ§æÂÂä½Âã â¢ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨å¯è½æÂÂäºÂç¸干æ¾ãÂÂè«Âé¿å Âå¨æ¤è£Âç½® éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥ç¼ç¾éÂÂæ§å¨ å¨ æÂÂä½Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå §ç¡æ³Âæ 你æ ï¼Âè« æ´æÂÂé» æ± ã â¢ è«Âå¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示＠å¨顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂä½Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æ¹使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ã è£Âå ¥éÂÂæ§å¨é»池1 æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨èÂÂé¢çÂÂé»池槽èÂÂã 2 è«Âä¾Âç §æÂÂ示 ï¼ î ＠î ＠ï¼Âå°Âå ©é¡ AA/R6 ä¹¾é»池æ¾堥 é»池槽ä¸Âã 3 éÂÂä¸Âé»池èÂÂã 注æ 使ç¨é¯誤çÂÂé»池å¯è½å¼Âèµ·å±éªï¼Âå¦Âæ¼ÂéÂȌÂÂçÂÂç¸ãÂÂè« éµå®Â以ä¸ÂäºÂ頠＠⢠è«Âå¿混åÂÂæ°èÂÂé»池使ç¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿混åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»池使ç¨ ï¼ éÂÂç¶å¤Âè§Âé¡Âä¼¼ï¼Âä½Âä¸Âå çÂÂé»池å¯è½å«ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»å£Âã â¢ è«Â確å®Âé»池çÂÂæ£負堩端èÂÂé»池槽ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ示ç¸符ã â¢ èÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â使ç¨çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ趠éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºé»池ã â¢ èÂÂçÂÂ廢èÂÂé»池æÂÂï¼ è«Âéµå®Âæ¿åºÂæ¢Âä¾ÂæÂÂé©ç¨æ¼貴åÂÂæÂÂå° Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Â堬報æÂÂ令è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂã è¦å â¢ è«Âå¿å¨é½å Âç´尠æÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂÂç±çÂÂå°æ¹使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¾ é»池＠å¦Âè»Âå §æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂæ ãÂÂå¦åÂÂé»池å¯è½æ¼ÂéÂȋÂÂçÂÂç¸æÂÂèµ·ç« ã åÂÂæÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂ縮çÂÂé»池çÂÂ壽å½æÂÂæÂÂè½ã 30 30 7 m HTP-330.book Page 14 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂä½ 04 15 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 4 ç« éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂ你系統å±Â示è¨Âå®Âå¼ æ¤ è¨Âå®Âå¯åÂÂæ èªåÂÂå±Â示å è½ ï¼Âæ¤å è½ å¨第ä¸Â次æ ä¸Âé»溠æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ å¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æ DEMO ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸Âè¨Âå® å¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æ¨å¯é¸æÂÂ＠⢠DEMO ON ï¼ éÂÂå§Âå±Â示顯示å¹Âã â¢ DEMO OFF ï¼ éÂÂéÂÂå±Â示顯示å¹Âï¼Âä¸Â系統é²堥徠æ©Âç æ Âã 使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æ å¤Âè²éÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£ ï¼ MCACC ＠系統å¯測éÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå § çÂÂé³場ç¹æ§＠å°Âé±éÂÂç°å¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂé³ç´Âå ¥èÂÂé ＠並測試è²éÂÂ延 é²èÂÂè²éÂÂé³é ã å®ÂæÂÂ系統éÂÂè´ÂçÂÂ麥å Â風è¨Âç½®å¾Â＠系統å°Âæ å©ç¨ä¸Âç³»åÂÂçÂÂ測試é³è³Â訠＠使ç¹å®Âæ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âå¼ èÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ ï¼Âé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂéÂÂæÂÂä½³åÂÂã 1 éÂÂ覠⢠ç¨æ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®çÂÂ測試é³é³éÂÂ極大 ï¼ ä½Âè«Âå¿å¨ è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂå°Âé³éÂÂè½Âå°Âï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂå°æÂÂä½³è¨Âç½®ç æ Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å¨ MCACC è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂ移åÂÂ麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã 1 å°Â麥å Â風æÂ¥ä¸Âå¾Âé¢æ¿ç MCACC SETUP MIC æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 è«Âå°Â麥å Â風置æ¼æ£常çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®ã 使ç¨桠åÂÂæÂÂ椠åÂÂå°Â麥 å Â風水 å¹³ æ¾置å¨ ç´ÂèÂÂè³ æµçÂÂé« çÂÂæ£ 常èÂÂè½ä½Âç½®ã è«Â確å®Â麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨éÂÂç¡éÂÂç¤Âç©ã 3 èÂ¥æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çºéÂÂé ï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î STANDBY/ON å°Âå ¶é» æºÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 4 æÂÂ丠MCACC ã æÂÂ丠MCACC å¾Âï¼Âè«Âç¡å¯è½ä¿ÂæÂÂå®ÂéÂÂãÂÂé³éÂÂå°ÂæÂÂèªåÂÂ讠大ï¼Â系統æÂÂ輸åºä¸Âé£串çÂÂ測試é³ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Âå¨å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ï¼ æÂÂ丠MCACC ã è£Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂ使ç¨ä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã â¢ èÂ¥é±éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂ夠＠NOISY å°ÂæÂÂå¨顯示å¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂçºÂéÂÂ示 äºÂç§ÂãÂÂèÂ¥è¦ÂçµÂæÂÂ並檢æÂ¥éÂÂé³çÂÂç´ 2 ï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC æ åÂÂ試ä¸Â次ï¼Â顯示å¹Âä¸Â顯示 RETRY æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ è¥顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ ERR MIC æ ERR SP è¨Âæ¯ ï¼ åÂÂ表示麥堠風æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé£æÂ¥å¯è½åºç¾åÂÂé¡ ã èÂ¥è¦ÂéÂÂ試 ï¼Âè«Âå¨顯 示 RETRY å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 MCACC è¨Âç½®å®ÂæÂÂå¾ ï¼Âé³éÂÂå°Âæ¢復çºæ£常é³éÂÂï¼Â顯示å¹Â丠æÂÂåºç¾ COMPLETE 4 並åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 5 éÂÂ註 1 æ¨åªéÂÂé²è¡Âä¸Â次èªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ï¼Âé¤éÂÂæ¨è®Âæ´æÂÂè²å¨æºè¨ÂæÂÂæ¿éÂÂä½Â置＠ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP 2 ⢠èÂ¥æ¿éÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Âé©åÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ï¼Âé±éÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂçÂÂå£Âè¿´é³ãÂÂå«é»ç¤ÂæÂÂè²å¨èÂÂ麥å Â風çÂÂç©é«Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼å¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯ 誤ãÂÂè«Â檢æÂ¥å¯è½影é¿室堧ç°å¢ÂçÂÂ家éÂȍ¨å ï¼Âå·氣æ©ÂãÂÂå°箱ãÂÂéÂȾÂÂçÂÂï¼Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«ÂéÂÂéÂÂå ¶é»æºÂã â¢ é¨åÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå¯è½æÂÂèÂÂ麥å Â風äºÂç¸ç¢çÂÂå¹²æ¾ãÂÂèÂ¥ç¼çÂÂæ¤æ 形ï¼Âè«Âå¨èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 èÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC ãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂï¼Â並根æ ERR è¨Âæ¯檢æÂ¥åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂ試èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®ã 4 èÂ¥æª顯示 COMPLETE ï¼Âå¾Âå¯è½å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ãÂÂè«Â檢æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Â並åÂÂ試ä¸Â次ã 5 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 18 é Âç 使ç¨ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Â以äºÂ解å¦Âä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE D VD/D VR1 DVD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ST ANDBY/ON TV INPUT CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOL U ME MCACC MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTRO L IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MC ACC SETUP MIC HTP-330.book Page 15 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ 05 16 ChH 第 5 章使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âæ¯èÂÂè½任ä½Â系統æ§å¶ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂæÂÂç°¡å®æ¹张ï¼Âæ è²å¨çÂÂ輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ åºä¾ÂæºÂè³ÂæÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂã èÂ¥æ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 4 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模 å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Âç 使ç¨åÂÂ段 ç°ç¹Âè²模张＠ã â¢ æÂÂ丠SURROUND 以便é¸æ AUTO èÂÂè½模å¼Âã èÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂçº Dolby Digital æ DTS ï¼ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ç 2 D æ DTS æÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç SURROUND æÂÂéµ ï¼Âè®Âæ´ èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 以ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂèÂÂè½ æ¨å¯以å¨ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂä¸Âï¼ èÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾Â溠ãÂÂç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂæ¯使ç¨ Dolby Pro Logic 解碼模å¼ÂçÂÂä¸Â種ç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂæ ç¢çÂÂçÂÂã èÂ¥æ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 4 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模 å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Âç 使ç¨åÂÂ段 ç°ç¹Âè²模张＠ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂ丠SURROUND 以便é¸æÂÂä»»ä¸ÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç SURROUND æÂÂéµ ï¼Âè®Âæ´ èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾çÂÂé¸頠è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã èÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂçº Dolby Digital æ DTS ï¼ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ç 2 D æ DTS æÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã â¢ AUTO ï¼ èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Âå¦Âä¸Â述＠⢠DOLBY PL ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic ï¼ ï¼ 4.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æ ＠é©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾Â溠⢠MOVIE ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Movie ï¼ ï¼ 5.1 è²éÂÂç°繠é³æÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂæÂÂæ¾é»影ä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âé©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾Â溠⢠MUSIC ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Music ï¼ ï¼ 5.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂæÂÂæ¾é³æ¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âé©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âè« åÂÂé±ä¸ÂæÂÂç Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ â¢ STEREO ï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Âç 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ 以 Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模张ï¼Âå¦Âä¸Âè¿°ï¼ÂèÂÂè½æÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯ 調æ´ä¸Â種è¨Âå®Âå¼ : ä¸Â置寬度ãÂÂ尺寸åÂÂå ¨æ¯ã 1 å¨åÂÂå Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模å¼ÂçÂÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼Âæ 丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) ï¼Âé¸æ ã C WIDTH ãÂÂã ã DIMEN. ãÂÂæ ã PANORAMA ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ C WIDTH ï¼Âä¸Â置寬度ï¼Âï¼ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæ··é³æ æÂÂï¼Âå°Âå³åÂÂèÂÂå·¦åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂæ´æ£åºä¾Âï¼Âé³å è½起ä¾Âæ´廣 ï¼Âè¼Âé«Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂæÂÂæ´窠ï¼Âè¼Âä½Âè¨Âå®Âå¼＠ã â¢ DIMEN. ï¼Â尺寸＠＠ç±åÂÂèÂÂå¾Â調æ´ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂ平衡çÂÂæ·± 度ï¼Â使è²é³ è½ èµ·ä¾Âæ´ é ï¼Âè² è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂæ´ è¿ ï¼Âæ£訠å®Âå¼＠ã â¢ PANORAMA ï¼Âå ¨æ¯＠＠å¯å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ç«Âé«Âè²é³åÂÂ延伸＠使ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ç¢çÂÂæ´ ãÂÂå ¨é¢ãÂÂçÂÂé³æÂÂã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) 調æ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book Page 16 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ 05 17 ChH ä¸Âæ 使ç¨åÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模张å¦Â第 4 é  æÂÂ述使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂï¼Âå¯以使ç¨ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ æÂÂ丠F.S.SURR 以é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Â以é¸æ FOCUS5.1 ã WIDE5.1 æ EXTRAPWR ã â¢ FOCUS5.1 ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂä¾Âå¼Âå°Âå°左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨ç è²é³æÂÂå°ÂèÂÂéÂÂä¸Â央åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè±Âå¯Âç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã â¢ WIDE5.1 ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂä¾Â毠FOCUS5.1 模å¼Âé³åÂÂæ´寬廣 çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã â¢ EXTRAPWR ï¼ å¾Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨輸åºç«Âé«Âè² ï¼Âå¤Âè²éÂÂé³ æºÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ï¼Â以æÂÂä¾Â強大çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé©ç¨æ¼任ä½Âå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ä¾Â溠ï¼Âæ ä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ種å¤Â樣çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂãÂÂéÂÂäºÂ模å¼Âæ¯以 第 6 é Âä¸ÂæÂÂè¿°ç æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½®æÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³èÂÂè½æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè¨Âè¨Âã â¢ æÂÂ丠ADVANCED 以é¸å ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã åÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂ＠⢠ACTION â é©ç¨æ¼è§Âè³Âé»影 ⢠UNPLUGED ï¼ é©ç¨æ¼è²æ¨Âé³溠⢠EXPANDED ＠延伸è²場 ⢠TV SURR. ï¼ å®è²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»è¦Â廣æÂÂæÂÂä¾Âç°ç¹Âé³æ â¢ SPORTS ï¼ é©åÂÂç¨æ¼è§Âè³Âé«Âè²ç¯Âç® â¢ ADV.GAME ï¼ é©åÂÂç¨æ¼é»è¦ÂéÂÂæ²è¨Âå â¢ VIRTUAL ï¼ å 使ç¨éÂÂä½Âé³åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¢çÂÂèÂÂ捠ç°ç¹Âé³æ â¢ X-STEREO ï¼ ç«Âé«Âè²é³æ¨Âä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂå¼·åÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æ 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ æ¨å¯以使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²è½åÂÂä»»ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²é ãÂÂæ æ¾ å¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæ ＠æÂÂæÂÂè²éÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂ縮混å¾Âå³éÂÂå°左åÂÂç½®î¿å³å 置æÂÂè²å¨åÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³ä¸Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂ丠SURROUND ï¼ ç´å°顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ STEREO ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç SURROUND æÂÂéÂ括Âè®Âæ´ èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ èÂ¥å¨ MP3 æ WMA å£Â縮éÂÂç¨Âä¸Â移é¤é³æÂÂè³ÂæÂÂï¼Âè²é³åÂÂ質 éÂÂ常æÂÂåºç¾ä¸Âå¹³åÂÂçÂÂé³å ã ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æ¡ç¨æ°ç DSP æÂÂè¡ ï¼Âå¯èÂÂç±éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè²å£ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿®æ´å£Â縮å¾ÂçÂÂ人工缺é· ï¼ å° CD çÂÂé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æ¢復è³å£Â縮çÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂé³æÂÂã â¢ èÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠SOUND RETRIEVER ã åÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨以ä¸Âå ©é  åÂÂè½éÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ＠⢠RTRV ON ï¼ éÂÂå ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ã ã â¢ RTRV OFF ï¼ éÂÂé ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ã ã ST TUNE ST ENTER TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME F. S . SURR ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME ADV ANCED ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SOUND RETRIEVER HTP-330.book Page 17 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ 05 18 ChH 使ç¨ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ æ¨å¯以使ç¨å¨第 15 é Âç 使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ ç°ç¹Âé³æ ä¸Âè¨Âå®Âç ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½è½åÂÂä¾ÂæºÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ MCACC EQ ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂçº EQ ON æ EQ OFF ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ å¨ EQ OFF è¨Âå®Âå¼ä¸Âï¼ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨çÂÂè¨Âå®ÂçºéÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂæÂÂè² å¨è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ è² éÂʌȦ é²èÂÂè² éÂÂä½Â溠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿ æ åÂÂä¾Âç 訠å®Âã â¢ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¨使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®å¾Âæ èªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å 強å°Âç½ å°Âç½強å (Dialogue Enhancement) Ã¥ÂÂè½æ¯çºçªÂ顯é»è¦ÂæÂÂé» å½±åÂÂè²帶èÂÂæ¯é³æÂÂçÂÂå°Âç½èÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂçÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ DIALOGUE ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂå°Âç½強åÂÂç¨Â度＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã å¯é¸æ OFF ( é ) ã MID ( 丠) æ MAX ( é« ) ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂå ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模张ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯éÂÂä½Âé³æÂÂä¾ÂæºÂä¸ÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂä½Âé³æÂÂé«Âé³ã ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯è®Âæ¨以ä½Âé³éÂÂæ¶è½實éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ TONE ï¼ ç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ QUIET æ MIDNIGHT ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ涠ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂã æ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã èÂÂè½模张＠è«Âé¸å BASS/ TRE ã 調æ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ 使ç¨ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³æ§å¶調æ´æ´é«Âé³調ã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ TONE ï¼ ç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ BASS/TRE ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ é¸æ BASS/TRE æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ涠ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂå ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模 å¼ÂãÂÂæ¨ç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂäºÂ模å¼Âã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸å BASS æ TREBLE ＠使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ調æ´é³æ ＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã å éÂÂä½Âé³é³é æ¬系統æÂÂä¾Â堩種ä½Âé³模张＠æ¨å¯以ç¨æ¼è£Âå¼·ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂä½Âé³é³ éÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ BASSMODE ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ＠é¸æÂÂé³æ ＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã å¯é¸æ OFF ( é ) ã MUSIC ( é³樠) æ CINEMA ( Ã¥ÂÂé¢ ) ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book Page 18 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¶è½廣æ 06 19 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 6 ç« æ¶è½廣æ æ¶è½廣æ 調諧å¨å¯æÂ¥æ¶ FM è AM 廣æ ＠並è®Âæ¨è½å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¶è½çÂÂé» å°è¨Âæ¶ä¸Âä¾Âï¼Âå¦Âæ¤便ä¸ÂéÂÂå¨æ¯Â次æ¶è½æÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調é¸ã 1 æÂÂ丠FM/AM å¯åÂÂæÂÂè³調諧å¨ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂ便å¯é¸å FM æ AM 波段ã 顯示å¹ÂæÂÂ顯示波段åÂÂé »çÂÂã 2 調é¸éÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂé »çÂÂã 報æÂÂä¸Â種調諧模å¼Âå¯ä¾Âé¸æ ＠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«ÂéÂÂ＠⢠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧 ï¼ éÂÂè¤Âæ TUNE /â 以åÂÂæÂÂ顯示頻çÂÂã â¢ èªåÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示å¹ÂéÂÂå§Â移å å¾Âæ¾éÂÂãÂÂ調諧å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂç´¢å°çÂÂéÂȌ°ãÂÂæÂÂçºÂæ¤ Ã¥ÂÂä½Â便å¯繼çºÂæÂÂç´¢ã â¢ é«ÂéÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ＠ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示å¹ÂéÂÂå§Âå¿« éÂÂ移åÂÂã 繼 çºÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéµ ï¼ ç´å°æ¾ å° è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂé »çÂÂçº æ¢ãÂÂå¿ è¦ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧微調頻çÂÂã æ¹å FM æÂ¥æ¶ä¸Âè¯ èÂ¥æ¨æ£以ç«Âé«Âè²æ¶è½ FM éÂȌ° ï¼Âä½Âæ¶è¨Âä¸Âä½³ï¼Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂè³å® è²éÂÂ以便æ¹åÂÂé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質ã 1 調é¸è³ FM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ FM MODE ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ FM MONO ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 調諧å¨èÂÂæ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âå®è²éÂÂæÂÂ示ç ＠＠æ 亮起ã é¸åÂÂä¸Âè¿°ç FM AUTO ï¼Â便å¯åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模张ï¼ÂæÂ¥æ¶ç«Âé«Âè²廣æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂ示ç ＠ï¼ÂæÂÂ亮起＠ã æ¹å AM é³æÂÂä¸Âä½³ æ¹å AM æ¶é³æ©Âé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂÂç°¡å®çÂÂæ¹å¼Âå°±æ¯確å®Âæ¿éÂÂå § çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯å¦éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂæ¨ä¹Âå¯以試èÂÂæ¹讠AM 迴路天ç·Âç ä½Âç½®èÂÂæ¹åÂÂã æ¹è®ÂéÂÂé³æÂÂå¶模张é²è¡Âä¸Âè¿°åÂÂä½Âå¾Âï¼ÂèÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³Âæ¹åÂÂé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質ï¼Âæ¨å¯使ç¨丠åÂÂçÂÂéÂÂé³æÂÂå¶模å¼Âç²å¾Âæ¹åÂÂãÂÂåªè¦Âé¸æÂÂè½起ä¾ÂæÂÂ好çÂÂé³ æÂÂå³å¯ã 1 調é¸è³ AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ NOISECUT ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂéÂÂé³æÂÂå¶模张＠1 ã 2 æ 3 ï¼ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã è¨Âæ¶éÂȌ° æ¨å¯以å²åÂÂé«Âé 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤便å¯è¼Âé¬Âæ¶è½åÂÂæ çÂÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âä¸Âå¿ æ¯Â次é²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調é¸ã 1 調諧è³ FM æ AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ã è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Âé¸æÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¥æ¶ (FM) æÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂæÂÂå¶模 å¼ (AM) ãÂÂéÂÂäºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂé Âè¨Âè¨Âå®Âä¸Âä½µå²åÂÂã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ ST.MEM. ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂé Â訠éÂȌ°ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° 1 è«Â確å®Âå·²é¸åÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ã 2 使ç¨ ST /â æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã â¢ æÂÂè 使ç¨æ¸åÂÂéµç´æÂ¥é¸åÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TON E SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR D VD/DVR1 DVD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP FM/AM HTP-330.book Page 19 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¶è½廣æ 06 20 ChH æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé èÂ¥ç¼ç¾ç¡æ³Â調諧éÂȌ° ï¼ åÂÂæ¬系統çÂÂé »çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå¯è½ä¸Âé©ç¨æ¼ æ¨æÂÂå¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家î¿å°åÂÂã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ ã AM 9K/10K ã ＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼＠ç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ AM 9K ï¼ AM çº 9 kHz éÂÂéÂÂï¼ FM çº 50 kHz éÂÂé â¢ AM 10K ï¼ AM çº 10 kHz éÂÂé ＠FM çº 100 kHz éÂÂé HTP-330.book Page 20 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 21 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 7 ç« ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 使ç¨ ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® æ¨å¯以徠ã è¨Âå® ã é¸å®åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 1 ï¼ å æ²éÂÂä½Â溠ã æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æ´以åÂÂéÂÂå®è²é é³æÂÂæÂÂæ¾ã æ¨å¯以使ç¨以ä¸ÂæÂÂéµæÂÂä½ ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å®ã è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Â第 15 é Âï¼ æÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æ è¨Âå® ã ç¶èÂÂæ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ ï¼Âé²ä¸Âæ¥調æ´è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂå¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¿ éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã é 種è¨Âå® è²éÂÂ你溠çÂÂæ¹张å¯è®Âæ¨ æ¶è½侠æºÂ並調 æ´ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ¾è²éÂÂçÂÂä½Â溠ã è«Â注æÂÂï¼ ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂæ¾çÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼è ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ç¡éÂÂã æ´é²éÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âæ¹å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯使ç¨測試é³ ã 詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 22 é Âç 使ç¨測試é³調æ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠ã 1 é¸æÂÂ以ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾ä¾ÂæºÂã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ CH LEVEL ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) é¸æÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) 調æ´è²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂã â¢ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã â¢ è¥系統èÂÂæ¼ ãÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ãÂÂæ ãÂÂèÂÂæ‹ÂÂ模å¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂèÂʊȴ ãÂÂèªåÂÂãÂÂ模 å¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ç«Âé«Âè²侠æºÂï¼Âå°Âç¡æ³Â調æ´ä¸Âç½®æÂÂç° ç¹Âè²éÂÂã 5 å®ÂæÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âå°ÂæÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âå¼ã æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå®Âå¼ èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 15 é Âï¼ æÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂç° ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå® ã ç¶èÂÂæ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ ï¼Âé²ä¸Âæ¥調æ´æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ è¨Âå®Âå¼å¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã å¾Âæ£常çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®è¨Âå®Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ DISTANCE ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) é¸æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨＠îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) 調æ´è·Âé¢ã 調æ´ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨＠⢠L ï¼ å·¦åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠C ï¼ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠R ï¼ å³åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SR ï¼ å³ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SL ï¼ å·¦ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SW ï¼ éÂÂä½Âé³ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢調æ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº 0.3 m è³ 9.0 m ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âå¼ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ 以ä½Âé³éÂÂè§Âè³ Dolby Digital æ DTS è³ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯è½ç¡泠渠æ¥Âè½å°ä½Âä½ÂæºÂé³æ â å æŽ¨åÂÂå°Âç½ãÂÂ使ç¨堶ä¸Âä¸Âé  å æ Âç¯Âå æ§å¶ ï¼ DRC ï¼Âè¨Âå®Âå¼便 å¯ æÂÂé«Âä½ ä½ÂæºÂé³ æÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ§å¶é«Âä½ÂæºÂé«Âé³ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶å é©ç¨æ¼ Dolby Digital Ã¥ÂÂè²帶åÂÂé¨å DTS å è²帶ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ DRC ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER ã éÂÂ註 1 æ¨éÂÂå¯徠ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å®ä¸Â調æ´堶ä»Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Â詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 19 é Âç æ¶è½廣æ åÂÂ第 26 é Âç 堶ä»Âè³Â訠ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book Page 21 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 22 ChH 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) é¸æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã è«Âé¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âé  è¨Âå®Âå¼＠⢠DRC OFF ï¼Âé Âè¨Âï¼ ï¼ ç¡åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æ´ ï¼Â以é«Âé³éÂÂè è½æÂÂè«Âé¸æÂÂæ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼＠⢠DRC MID ï¼ é©ä¸Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ â¢ DRC HIGH ï¼ æ¸Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯Âå ï¼ÂéÂÂä½Â大è²é³éÂÂ並æÂÂé« è¼Âå°Âè²çÂÂé³æÂÂï¼ 4 æÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæÂÂã éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ æÂÂå®ÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂç Dolby Digital 編碼æ¹å¼Âæ DTS Ã¥ÂÂè²帶ç æÂÂæ¾æ¹张ã æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨æ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂèªÂé³æÂÂé 製ç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂé³æÂÂè²éÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ DUALMONO ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) é¸æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã è«Âé¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âé  è¨Âå®Âå¼＠⢠CH1 MONO ï¼Âé Âè¨Âï¼ ï¼ å æÂÂæ¾è²é 1 ⢠CH2 MONO ï¼ å æÂÂæ¾è²é 2 ⢠CH1/CH2 ï¼ å ©åÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç±åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæ¾ 4 æÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæÂÂã 使ç¨測試é³調æ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨測試é³ä½ÂçºåÂÂèÂÂè¨Âå®Âè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ æ¾ä¾Â溠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 21 é Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ ãÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ è²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæ¾測試é³ï¼Â以ä¾Âæ¨å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂ調æ´ä½ÂæºÂã è«Â注æÂÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂä¾Â溠çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ç¡éÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SURROUND 以便é¸æÂÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã â¢ èÂ¥æ³è¦Âè¨Âå®Âç«Âé«Âè²ï¼ÂéÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼Âè«Âé¸ æ STEREO èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 2 æÂÂ丠TEST TONE ã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæ¾測試é³ã 3 æÂÂæ¾測試é³æÂÂï¼Âå¯使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ調æ´ 該è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂã æ¤ç®çÂÂå¨æ¼調æ´ä½ÂæºÂï¼Â確ä¿Âæ¨å¾Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è½å°çÂÂ測試 é³é³éÂÂçÂÂç¸åÂÂãÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨ VOLUME /â æÂÂéµ ＠調æ´測試é³輸åºç æ´é«Âé³é ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼＠ã â¢ èÂÂ¥ 系統è æ¼ ãÂÂç« é«Âè²ãÂÂæ ãÂÂèÂÂæ‹ÂÂ模 å¼Âï¼Âå° ç¡ æ³Â調 æ´ä¸Âç½®æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²éÂÂã â¢ ç±æ¼ éÂÂä½Âé³ æ ç¢ ç 趠你頻çÂÂï¼Â堶實 é é³ æ å¯ è½ æ´大 è²ãÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°èÂÂè½ä¾ÂæºÂæ ï¼Â調æ´éÂÂä½Âé³ä½ÂæºÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 21 é Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂå¾Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæÂÂ測試é³è¨Âå®Âã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âå¼ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOLUME SR ST TUNE TUNE ENTER TEST TONE SURROUND HTP-330.book Page 22 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âæ¥締08 23 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 8 ç« å ¶ä»Âæ¥締éÂÂ覠⢠尠æ¤系統é²è¡Âæ¥締æÂÂè®Âæ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂé» æºÂ＠並å°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ãÂÂå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ¥ ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³堷åÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ä½Â輸堥ï¼Â以ä¾Âæ¸ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾è£Â置使ç¨ ＠妠DVD ã CD å MD æÂÂæ¾å¨çÂÂã â¢ å° DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨çÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂæ¸ä½Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½ é³çÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âå DIGITAL 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨å¸Âé¢ä¸Â販å®çÂÂå Âå¸çºÂç·ÂæÂÂé¨éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸é»ç·Âé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ã é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½® å¯以使ç¨ ANALOG 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½®ï¼Âå¦Âæ¶é é³æ©ÂçÂÂãÂÂ詳細æÂ¥ç·Âè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 11 é Âç 使ç¨æ¤系統你çºé»è¦Âé³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼Âæ¤èÂÂ說æÂÂé£æÂ¥é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³æÂÂ輸åº＠ä½Âä¹Âé© ç¨æ¼任ä½Âé¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂé£æ¥＠ã èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³æÂÂä¾Â溠æ¨习å¯以尠顠毠åÂÂæ¸你ç 夠æÂ¥é³æ 侠溠é£æÂ¥è³ æ¬ ç³» çµ±ã æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂä¾ÂæºÂå æ¾¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æ¶å¨ã CD éÂÂé³å¨çÂÂãÂÂé¡Â毠ä¾ÂæºÂÃ¥ÂÂå æ¾¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ© ãÂÂå¦è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸ÂæÂÂç é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® ã 1 è¥系統å°ÂæªéÂÂæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î STANDBY/ON 便å¯éÂÂæ©Âã åÂÂæÂÂè«Â確宠å¤Âæ¥侠溠ï¼Âé»覠æ©ÂãÂÂè¡ æÂÂæÂ¥æ¶ å¨çÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂé»溠已éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 é¸å DVD/DVR1 ã DVD/DVR2 ã DIGITAL æ ANALOG ＠以便é¸æÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂã éÂÂäºÂæÂÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 3 å¿ è¦ÂæÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂã é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締èÂ¥çº AM å¤Âæ¥天締＠è«Â使ç¨ 5 è³ 6 m çÂÂä¹Âç¯åºçµÂç·£é»締＠並å®Âè£Âæ¼室堧æÂÂ室å¤ÂãÂÂè«Âä¿ÂæÂÂ迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âã èÂ¥çº FM å¤Âæ¥天締＠è«Â使ç¨ PAL æÂ¥é Âé£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥ç FM 天締ã SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 MC ACC SETUP MIC æÂÂæ¾å¨ç è³æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸＠è³æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼Âå ÂçºÂï¼ æ DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE FM/AM ST ANDBY/ON D VD/DVR1 DVD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CO NTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 室å¤Â天締FM å¤Âæ¥天締AM å¤Âæ¥天締迴路天締P AL æ¥頠(5 m è³ 6 m) 室堧天締ï¼Âä¹Âç¯åºå¡ÂæÂÂéÂÂ屬ç·Âï¼ HTP-330.book Page 23 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âæ¥締08 24 ChH å°Âæ¤è£Âç½®é£æÂ¥å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ èÂ¥æÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ 1 ï¼Âå¯使ç¨ SR é£æ¥締2 é£æÂ¥æ¬è£Âç½® ï¼ å©ç¨åÂÂ種便å©åÂÂè½æÂÂæ§æ¬è£Âç½® ï¼ å¦Âé»漿顯示å¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæ å¨ã èªåÂÂè¦Âè¨Â輸堥åÂÂæ ã é»漿顯示å¨ç«é¢åºç¾çÂÂ顯示è£Âç½® è¨Âæ¯以åÂÂèªåÂÂé³éÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½çÂÂã éÂÂ覠⢠æ¥丠SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âå¾ ï¼ÂèÂ¥è¦Âæ§å¶æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³＠æ¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§ å¨忠é Âå°ÂæºÂé»漿顯示å¨＠èÂÂä¸Âæ¯æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ顯示裠置ã â¢ è«Â使ç¨ä¸Âç°çÂÂè¿·ä½ æÂÂé  SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°Âæ¬è£Âç½®ç CONTROL IN æÂ¥ä¸Âé»漿顯示å¨ç CONTROL OUT ã 3 æ¨忠é Âå Âå°Âæ¬è£Âç½®é²è¡Âä¸ÂäºÂè¨Âå® ï¼ æÂÂå¯使ç¨堶ä»Âä¸ÂæÂÂç 堠éÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç SR è¨Âå® ã å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç SR è¨Âå® å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨已使ç¨ SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°Âæ¬è£Âç½®é£æÂ¥å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示 å¨ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Âé²è¡Â以ä¸Âè¨Âå®Âã 1 æÂÂ丠SR ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ SETUP ï¼Âç¶徠æÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æÂÂè¦Â調æ´çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ã å¨顯示å¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂ覽æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸頠æ ＠æÂÂ顯示ç®åÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ãÂÂè«Âå é±以ä¸Âè¦Âé»Âï¼ÂäºÂ解å®Âæ´çÂÂ渠å®以åÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸頠çÂÂ說æÂÂã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Â調æ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ã 5 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠3 è· 4 ï¼Âé²è¡Âå ¶ä»Âè¨Âå®Âã 6 å®ÂæÂÂå¾Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæ SR è¨Âå®Âé¸å®ã é»漿顯示å¨èªåÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½ éÂÂå ãÂÂé³é æ§å¶ãÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂèÂ¥é åÂÂæÂ¥æ¶ éÂÂä½Âé³ï¼ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂÂ¥ æ¶é ä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½è®Âæ´çºå¾ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³æ¶è½é³æ ＠èÂÂä¸Â使ç¨ é»漿顯示å¨æ¶è½æ ï¼Â妠DVD ï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé» 漿顯示å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂå° æÂÂèªåÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ VOL.C ON ï¼ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¬è£Âç½®é»æºÂæÂÂè®Âæ´輸堥åÂÂè½徠＠é» 漿顯示å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂæÂÂè½ÂçºéÂÂé³ ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤便å æÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ¬è£Âç½® çÂÂé³æÂÂã â¢ VOL.C OFF ï¼ æ¬è£Âç½®ç¡æ³Âæ§å¶é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂã éÂÂ註 1 æ¬系統èÂÂæÂÂæ 2003 å¹´å¾ÂçÂÂç¢çÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç¸容ã 2 å¯åÂÂå ÂéÂÂ購買ä¸Âç°ç SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âé¶件æ¨ÂèÂÂçº ADE7095 ãÂÂå¦ÂéÂÂ購買 SR é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âæ´½å ÂéÂÂ客æ¶æ¯æ´é¨éÂÂã 3 èÂ¥æ¬è£Âç½®ç CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥é»漿顯示å¨ç CONTROL OUT ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨æ¬è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ã å³使èÂÂæ¼徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼Âåªè¦Âé»æºÂå°ÂæªéÂÂéÂÂï¼ æ¨ä»Âå¯使 ç¨é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ã SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN CON TROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL A UDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ CONTROL IN CONTROL OUT ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SR HTP-330.book Page 24 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âæ¥締08 25 ChH ä¸Âæ é»漿顯示å¨èªåÂÂ輸堥åÂÂæ 使é»漿顯示å¨è½å¨æ¨è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½æ ï¼Âèª Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³æ£確çÂÂ輸堥溠＠æ¨éÂÂè¦Âè®Â顯示å¨æÂÂæÂÂå°系統已é£ æÂ¥ã ä¾Â妠＠è¥尠DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç DV1 輸堥æºÂå é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂ輸堥 2 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨æ¤è«Âé¸å DV1 PDP2 訠å®Âå¼ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤ç¶æ¨å°ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½åÂÂæÂÂçº DV1 觠賠DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨堧容æ ＠é»漿顯示å¨å°ÂæÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³輸堥 2 ã æ¨å¯å¨æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³輸堥åÂÂè½ ï¼ DV1 ï¼ DVD/DVR1 ï¼ ã DV2 ï¼ DVD/DVR2 ï¼ ã DIG ï¼ DIGITAL ï¼ ã ANA ï¼ ANALOG ï¼ ï¼ ä¸Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠NONE ï¼ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé»漿顯示å¨輸堥 ⢠PDP1 è³ PDP7 ï¼ å°Âé»漿顯示å¨輸堥åÂÂæÂÂçº堶ä¸Âä¸Âå 編 èÂÂçÂÂ輸堥侠æºÂã ï¼Âè«Â注 æÂÂï¼Â顯 示çÂÂç·¨èÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¬è£Âç½® é£æÂ¥çÂÂé»漿顯示å¨èÂÂå®ÂãÂÂ＠⢠TVTN ï¼ å°Âé»漿顯示å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³堶堧建é»è¦Â調諧å¨ Ã¥ÂÂ註 ⢠è«Â注æ ＠PDP 輸堥 ï¼Âä¾Â妠PDP7 ï¼ å¨æ¨çÂÂé»漿顯示å¨丠å¯è½稱çº ã PC 輸堥ã ã â¢ å¨徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âä¸Âï¼ SR è¨Âå®Âå¼ä»ÂçºæÂÂæÂÂã â¢ SR è¨Âå®Âå¼並ä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿ FM/AM 調諧å¨åÂÂè½ã 尠SR 模å¼ÂèÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨æÂÂé Â使ç¨ 1 æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç SR ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ SR ON ï¼Âç¶ å¾ æÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ å³使å°ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢復＠SR è¨Âå®Âå¼ ä»Âä¿ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®ÂãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé»æºÂå¾Âï¼Â便æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèª Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂ輸堥åÂÂæÂÂã â¢ èÂ¥æÂÂ丠SR é£æ¥締ï¼Âæ å¨ SR éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Âé»漿顯示å¨é»溠éÂÂéÂÂï¼ SR ON è¨Âå®Âå¼ä»Âä¿ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®Âã â¢ èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ SR OFF ï¼Âè«Âæ ¹æÂÂæ¥驠1 è· 2 çÂÂæÂÂ示 ï¼Âç¶ å¾Âé¸æ SR OFF ã åÂÂ註 ⢠å³使é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨å¨徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âä¸Âï¼Âæ¨ä»Âå¯ æ§å¶æ¬è£Âç½®ï¼Âä½ÂèÂ¥éÂÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨é»溠＠AC off ï¼Â並 å° SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æ¬è£Âç½®ç CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ ï¼ åÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨ æ¬ è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§ æ æÂÂå¨æÂÂé»漿顯 示 å¨çÂÂé æ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨æ§å¶æ¬è£Âç½®ã éÂÂæ¼æ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ æÂÂå¤Â種å ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯æ´ SR CONTROL é£æÂ¥ï¼Âå°ÂéÂÂäºÂé£æ¥訠åÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂæºÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¨å³å¯使ç¨ã 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨æ ï¼Âæ§å¶è¨ÂèÂÂæÂÂ沿èÂÂé»路å³éÂÂè³é©ç¶çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨é¸æÂÂ使ç¨æ¤åÂÂè½ ï¼ è«Â確å®Âè³å°Âå°Âä¸ÂçµÂé¡Âæ¯ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸æ¸ ä½Âé³æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âï¼Âä½ÂçºæÂ¥å°ç¨éÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨任丠å´é½æ å®è²éÂÂè¿· ä½ æÂÂé Âç é£æ¥締＠é å¦ 購＠ï¼Âå°Âå¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âç CONTROL IN é£æÂ¥å°æÂ¥æ¶ éÂÂä½Âé³ä¸Âç CONTROL OUT ã å¦Âæ¤æ¨ 便å¯尠堶éÂÂæ§ å¨å°Â溠æ¤ æÂ¥æ¶é ä½Âé³é¨ éÂÂçÂÂ顯 示裠置ï¼Âé²èÂÂæ§å¶堶ä»Âè¨Âå ï¼Âå¦Âæ«Âä¸Âç DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Âï¼ ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以ä¸Âè¿°æ¹张ï¼Âå°Âæ¤æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³é£æÂ¥è³é»漿顯示 å¨ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤ä¸Âä¾Âï¼Âæ¨就éÂÂå°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»漿顯示å¨ï¼Â以 便æ§å¶ DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨ãÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³以åÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ã HTP-330.book Page 25 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 26 ChH 第 9 ç« å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ç¶ÂéÂÂç¹å®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¾Âå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ·æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé»溠＠æ¨å¯æ¾å¿Âå ¥ç¡ã 1 1 æÂÂ丠SLEEP æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂä»»ä¸Âé¸頠ã æÂÂ以ä¸Âé¸頠å¯ä¾Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠SLP ON ï¼ ç´Âä¸Âå°ÂæÂÂå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»溠⢠SLP OFF ï¼ åÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ é¸æ SLP ON å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次 SLEEP å¯檢 æÂ¥å©é¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂãÂÂæ¯Âæ¢Âç·Â代表素12 Ã¥ÂÂé ï¼Âå©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂ＠＠調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 èÂ¥æ¨覺å¾Â太亮ï¼Âå¯調æÂÂ顯示å¹ÂçÂÂ亮度ã 2 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ DIMMER ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ LIGHT æ DARK ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã DTS CD è¨Âå®Âå¼ èÂ¥æ¨è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾ DTS 編碼ç CD å Âç¢Âç ＠æ¨éÂÂè¦Âè®Âæ´æ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼ æÂÂå¯è½å°解碼çÂÂè¨ÂèÂÂã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æ CD TYPE ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸Âè¨Âå® å¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æ¨å¯é¸æÂÂ＠⢠NORMAL ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂæ¾ä¸Â莳æ CD ãÂÂé¨å DTS 編碼 ç CD æÂÂæ¼æÂÂæ¾æÂÂç¢çÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ DTS-CD ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂæ¾ DTS 編碼ç CD ï¼Âè«Â注æÂÂï¼Âå¯è½ æÂÂçÂ¥éÂÂä¸Âè¬ CD Ã¥ÂÂé¢é¨åÂÂçÂÂæ²ç®ã éÂÂè¨Â系統 使ç¨æ¤ç¨ÂåºÂå¯å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統è¨Âå®Âå¼æ¢復è³åº廠è¨Âå®Âã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統é»æºÂã 2 æÂÂä½ SURROUND ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Â顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON æÂÂéµã ä¸Â次éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»æºÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼é½æÂÂéÂÂæ°è¨Âå®Âã éÂÂ註 1 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂï¼Â顯示å¹ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂÂã 2 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂï¼Âä¸Âè«Âæ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼çºä½Âï¼Â顯示å¹Âé½æÂÂè®ÂæÂÂã ST TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SLEEP SR SLEEP SL P --- -- ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book Page 26 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 27 ChH ä¸Âæ å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¸ÂæÂÂæ¨è½夠å¨æÂ¥å¾Â享åÂÂæ¬系統æÂÂ帶ä¾ÂçÂÂæ¨Â趣 ï¼ å æ¤é¸ æÂÂå®Âè£Âå°é»ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âè¨Âä½Â以ä¸Âè¦Âé»Âï¼ è« î å¨éÂÂ風è¯好çÂÂæ¿éÂÂ堧使ç¨æ¬系統ã î å°Âæ¬系統æ¾å¨穩åºãÂÂå¹³å¦çÂÂæ°´å¹³é¢ï¼Âå¦Âæ¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç½®ç©æ«ÂæÂÂé³é¿ æ¶丠ã è«Âå¿ î æ¼é«Â溫æÂÂæ¿Âæ°£éÂÂçÂÂå°æ¹使ç¨æ¬系統ï¼Âå æ¾¾å°Âç©åÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂç¢ çÂÂç±æºÂçÂÂéÂȌ¨ç¢åÂÂã î å°Âæ¬系統æ¾å¨çªÂå°æÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½åÂÂé½å Âç´å°Âä¹ÂèÂÂã î å¨ç°塵éÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¼潮æ¿ÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Â使ç¨æ¬系統ã î å°Âæ¬系統ç´æÂ¥æ¾å¨æ´大å¨ä¸Âæ¹ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾å¨堶ä»Â使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂè®Âç±ç ç«Âé«Âè²系統è£Âç½®ä¸Âã î å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂç£è¦Âå¨éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨æ¬系統ï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¢çÂÂå¹²æ¾ ï¼Â尤堶æ¯使ç¨室堧天ç·ÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã î å¨å»Âæ¿æ 堶 ä»Âå¯è½ 使 系統æ´ é²æ¼油 ç  æÂÂè¸氣 ç å° æ¹使ç¨ æ¬ 系統ã î å°Âæ¬系統 æ¾ å¨åÂÂé ç å°毯丠æÂÂç¨帠è ä½Âï¼Â以 å  é» ç¤Â系統 ç æ£ç±ã î å°Â系統æ¾å¨ä¸Â平穩çÂÂ表é¢ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Âé¢ç©Âç¡æ³Âæ¯æÂÂ系統åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè ³ æ¶çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âã è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© æ¨å¯以使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæ§é»è¦Âæ© ãÂÂèÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æ¤åÂÂè½＠æ¨忠é Âå Â使ç¨ä¸Âé Â表ä¸ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨Â碼è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé»æºÂã 2 æÂÂä½ CLEAR æÂÂéÂ括Â輸堥é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨Â碼ã â¢ è¥表ä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂæ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱 ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨æ¤éÂÂæ§ å¨æÂÂæ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 å°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î TV ï¼Â確èªÂéÂÂæ§å¨æ¯å¦ å¯ç¨ã èÂ¥éÂÂæ§å¨çÂÂè¨Âå®Âæ£確 ï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥æªéÂÂæ© ï¼Âä¸Âåº ç¾堶ä»Âæ¨Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æ°代碼並éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠2 ã 使ç¨é»è¦ÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂéµ ä¸Â表說æÂÂå¦Âä½Â使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã æÂÂéµ Ã¥ÂÂç¨ î TV æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂé ï¼Âå¾ æ©Âï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©Âé»溠INPUT æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®Âæ´é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè¦Âè¨Â輸堥 TV VOLUME ç¨æ¼調æ´é»è¦Âæ©Âé³é TV CHANNEL ç¨æ¼è½ÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé »é ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND V OLUME SETUP TEST TON E CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC AD V ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOL UME SR FM/AM D VD/DVR1 D VD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT CHANNEL VOL UME HTP-330.book Page 27 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 28 ChH é Âè¨Â代碼表 è«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå®Âæ£確é Âè¨Â代碼å¾Âï¼Âå¯è½åªæÂÂç¹å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¯ä¾Âæ§å¶ï¼ÂæÂÂè 表ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ç¡æ³Âç¨æ¼æ¨ç®åÂÂçÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656, 668 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646, 669, 670 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627, 667 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIDEN 671 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 HTP-330.book Page 28 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 29 ChH ä¸Âæ æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ 人åÂÂç¶Â常é¯å°Âä¸Âæ£確ä¹ÂæÂÂä½Âç¶æÂÂ系統æ éÂÂæÂÂç°常ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨èªÂçºæ¬æ©ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âç°常ä¹ÂèÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âé²è¡Â檢æÂÂ¥ ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¯ è½æ¯堶ä»Âè£Âç½®ç¼çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡ÂãÂÂè«Âä»Â細檢æ¥堶ä»Â使ç¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè£Âç½®åÂÂéÂȌ¨è¨Âå ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¥èÂÂ以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âå¾Âä»Âç¡æ³Âæ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°±è¿Âæ´½ è©¢æ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾Â代çºç¶Âä¿®ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¬系統æ¯å çºåÂÂå°éÂÂéÂȍÂÂå¤Âä¾ÂæÂÂæÂÂè´使ç¡æ³Âæ£常æÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«Âå°Âé»æºÂæÂÂé Âå¾Â輸åºæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå»ï¼Â以åÂÂ復æ£ 常çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæ Âã â¢ èÂ¥æ¯èÂÂé³æÂÂç¸éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âä¹Âä¸Â併檢æÂ¥é³æÂÂæÂÂæ¾è£Âç½®çÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±è£Âç½®çÂÂæÂÂä½Â說æÂÂã ä¸Âè¬ Ã¥ÂÂ顠解決辦泠é»æºÂç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂçªÂç¶é 橠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¯è½顯示 ä¸Âé¯誤è¨Âæ¯＠ã â¢ æÂ¥éÂÂæ¬æ©Âé»æºÂï¼ÂçÂÂå¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 確å®Â主æ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂç·ÂæÂÂç¡é¬Âè«çÂÂæ 形ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂé¬Âè«ï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂé æÂÂ系統èªåÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æ¯å¦æ£確ã â¢ è«Â確å®ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³å¨åÂÂæ¯å¦æÂÂ足夠çÂÂéÂÂ風空éÂÂã â¢ 確å®Â主é»æºÂçÂÂé»å£Â確實é©ç¨æ¼æÂŒÂÂæ©Â種ã â¢ 試èÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³éÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¬æ©ÂæÂÂè³æÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂèÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂç¶Âä¿®ã é¸æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½å¾Âï¼Âæ²Âæ é³æÂÂ輸åºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ£使ç¨å¤Âé¨輸堥ï¼Âè«Â確å®Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æ¯å¦æ£確 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® ï¼ ã â¢ 調é«Âé³éÂÂã â¢ æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç MUTE 以éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½ã ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¡ æ³Â輸åºè²é³ã â¢ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 21 é Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 以檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ä½ÂæºÂã â¢ 確èªÂæªé¸å AUTO ã STEREO æ VIRTUAL 模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 16 é Âç 以ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂèÂÂè½ ï¼Âã â¢ æ£確å°æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±æÂ¥ç·Âï¼ ã ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨é²è¡Âæ æ§ã â¢ æ´æÂÂé»池ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 14 é Âç è£Âå ¥éÂÂæ§å¨é»池＠ã â¢ è«Âå¨ 7 m å §çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以 30 ð çÂÂè§Â度å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂä½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 14 é Âç 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ ï¼ ã â¢ 移é¤éÂÂç¤Âç©æÂÂå¾Âå ¶ä»Âä½Âç½®æÂÂä½Âã â¢ é¿å ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂå°é½å Âç´å°Âã â¢ èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂÂä½Âå ¶ä»Âé£æÂ¥è³æ¾¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç CONTROL OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Â確å®Âå·²æÂ¥ä¸Âæ§å¶ é£æÂ¥ç·ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸é»ç·ÂæÂÂè³å°Âä¸ÂçµÂçÂÂé¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂé£æÂ¥ç·Âã ï¼Â第 25 é Â＠⢠è¥使ç¨ SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³èÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ï¼Âè«Â檢æÂ¥æ¯å¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»漿顯示å¨é»溠ãÂÂè«Âå°Âé æ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»漿顯示å¨ï¼Âå³å¯æÂÂæ§æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ã â¢ è«Â確宠CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæª誤æÂÂ堥任ä½Âç©é«Âã HTP-330.book Page 29 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 30 ChH 調諧å¨ é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ è©Âå½Â表 ç± Dolby Laboratories æÂÂæ¬Â製é ã ãÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âã ã ã Dolby ãÂÂã ã Pro Logic ã èÂÂé D æ¨ÂèªÂæ¯ Dolby Laboratories çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ樠ã "DTS" å "DTS Digital Surround" çºæ¸碼影é¢系統堬å¸ (DTS, Inc.) çÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã åÂÂ顠解決辦泠æ¶è½éÂȌ°廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ顯 çÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ è«Âæ¥丠AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æ¥締ï¼Â並å 以調æ´æ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Â以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³çÂÂæÂ¥æ¶æÂÂæÂÂãÂÂæ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦ å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âæ¢Âå §é¨æÂÂå¤Âé¨ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締＠ã â¢ å®Â堨伸å±Âé FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âï¼Â調æ´æÂÂä½³æÂ¥æ¶çÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âåºå®Âæ¼çÂÂä¸ÂãÂÂæ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸ÂçµÂå¤Âé¨ FM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締ï¼Âã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½é æÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Â堶移走ã â¢ 調諧éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âé©ç¨æ¼æ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂ家æÂÂå°åÂÂãÂÂèÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ調諧éÂÂéÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 20 é Âç æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé ã èªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ç¡æ³ÂæÂ¥æ¶ å°æÂÂäºÂéÂȌ°ã â¢ éÂȌ°è¨ÂèÂÂ微弱ãÂÂèªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½å è½åµ測å°è¨ÂèÂÂç¼å°Âè¯好çÂÂç¡ç·ÂéÂȌ°ãÂÂèÂ¥è¦Âç²å¾Âæ´å éÂÂæÂÂçÂÂ調諧梠件ï¼Âå¯æÂ¥ä¸Âä¸ÂçµÂ室å¤Â天ç·Âã è¨Âæ¯ 說æ 2CH ONLY ⢠æÂÂä½Âå é©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âå ç®åÂÂä¾ÂæºÂçºå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂèÂÂç¡æ³Âé²è¡Âã 96K ⢠å ä¾ÂæºÂçº 96 kHz æ¸ä½Â使æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°ç¦Âæ¢ã MUTING ⢠ç±æ¼é³æÂÂ被éÂÂé³ï¼Âå æ¤使ç¨æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°éÂÂå¶ ï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠MUTE ï¼Âã EXIT ⢠æ¤è¨Âæ¯æÂÂå¨é¸å®éÂÂç½®ä¸Â段æÂÂéÂÂå¾ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåºæÂÂåºç¾ã NOISY ⢠å èÂÂæ¯éÂÂé³太é«ÂèÂÂç¡æ³Âé Âå©å®Âæ MCACC è¨Âå®Âã ERR MIC â¢ å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æªå°Â麥å Â風æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ£確èÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã ERR SP â¢ å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æªå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ£確èÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã EEP ERROR ⢠ç¶Âä¿®äºÂå®Âè«Â洽詢æ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã NO SPTYP ⢠試èÂÂéÂÂéÂÂ系統é»æºÂç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥ä»Âç¼çÂÂé¯誤ï¼Âè«Âæ´½å ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã Dolby Digital ç± Dolby 實é©Â室æÂÂç Âç¼åºçÂÂ夠è²éÂÂé³æÂÂ編碼系統ï¼Âè PCM 編碼ç¸è¼Âä¸Âï¼Âå¯å¨å Âç¢Âä¸Âå² Ã¥ÂÂæ´å¤Âé³æÂÂã DolbyPro Logic II ç± Dolby 實é©Â室æÂÂç Âç¼çÂÂç©é£ 解碼ç§ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯å°Âä»»ä½ÂäºÂè²é çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂé³æÂÂï¼Â妠CD Ã¥ÂÂé»è¦Â廣 æÂÂï¼Â延伸è³äºÂè²éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âå·¦î¿ä¸Âç½®î¿å³î¿左ç°ç¹Âî¿å³ ç°ç¹Âï¼Âï¼Âç¢çÂÂç°ç¹ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã DTS ç± DTS æÂÂç Âç¼åºçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂé³ æÂÂ編碼系統ï¼ÂèÂÂèÂÂè¡Â碼調讠編碼ç¸è¼Âä¸Âï¼Âå¯å¨å Âç¢Âä¸Âå² Ã¥ÂÂæ´å¤Âé³æÂÂã HTP-330.book Page 30 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 31 ChH ä¸Âæ è¦Âæ ¼ SX-SW330 é³æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ â¢ æ´大å¨é¨å RMS Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂ輸åº＠åÂÂç½®ãÂÂä¸Âç½®ãÂÂç°繠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . æ¯Âè²é 100 W ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 4 ⦠＠éÂÂä½Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 100 Hz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 4 ⦠＠⢠FM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz è³ 108 MHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 ⦠＠ä¸Â平衡张⢠AM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥Âʊȴ 9 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz è³ 1602 kHz 以 10 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz è³ 1700 kHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 迴路天締⢠éÂÂä½Âé³é¨å é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ä½Âé³åÂÂå°Âè½å°å 系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå é¡Âå®ÂæÂÂé» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz è³ 1.0 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ⢠堶仠é»æºÂéÂÂæ± . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 220 V è³ 240 V ï¼ 50 Hz/60 Hz èÂÂéÂȎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W å¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ ÂèÂÂéÂȎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W 尺寸 . . . 200 mm ï¼Â寬＠x 375 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x 428 mm ï¼Â深＠éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg ⢠é Â件 éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AA/R6 ä¹¾é»池ï¼Â以便æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæ§å¨＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Ã¥ÂÂ軸é»締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 顯示é£æ¥締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AM 迴路天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 麥å Â風 ï¼Âä¾Âèªå MCACC è¨Â置＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 é»æºÂç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Â大＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 å¢Âå¡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 æ¾ÂÂä½Â說æ S-ST330 æÂÂè²å¨系統 ï¼Âå 置 æÂÂè²å¨ x2 ã ç°ç¹Âæ è²å¨ x2 ãÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ x2 ＠⢠åÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼Âæ¸æ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â＠系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå é¡Âå®ÂæÂÂé» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W 尺寸 . . . .100 mm ï¼Â寬＠x 100 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x 102.5 mm ï¼Â深＠éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼Âæ¸æ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â＠系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå é¡Âå®ÂæÂÂé» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W 尺寸 . . . .100 mm ï¼Â寬＠x 100 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x 102.5 mm ï¼Â深＠éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠é Â件 æÂÂè²å¨é£æ¥締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Âå°Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 æ¯æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 èº絲 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 çºÂç¹Â管 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Ã¥ÂÂ註 ⢠å ç¢åÂÂæ¹è¯ï¼Âè¦Âæ ¼èÂÂè¨Âè¨Âå¦ÂæÂÂè®Âæ´ï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¦è¡ÂéÂÂçÂ¥ã HTP-330.book Page 31 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
<ARE7636-A> Pu blished by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation . All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Printed in China HTP-330.book Page 32 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear , and 5 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En CAUTION The î ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference. HTP-330.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Contents 3 En English Contents 01 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Front surround setup (recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wall mounting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Before mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connecting up Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Using this system for TV audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 03 Controls and displays Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 14 04 Getting started System demo setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 05 Listening to your system Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Enhancing dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . . 18 Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 06 Listening to the radio Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Changing the frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 07 Surround sound settings Using the Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone . . . . 22 08 Other connections Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . . 23 Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . . 24 SR Setup for Pioneer plasma displays . . . . . . . . . 24 Using the SR mode with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 About control out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 09 Additional information Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 DTS CD setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using the TV remote control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following items are all supplied. Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW330) box: ⢠Remote control (page 13) ⢠AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2 (page 14) ⢠Display unit (page 12) ⢠Power cords x2 (page 11) ⢠AM loop antenna (page 9) ⢠FM wire antenna (page 9) ⢠Display cable (page 9) ⢠Coaxial cable (page 23) ⢠Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 15) ⢠Non-skid pads (large) x4 ( page 5, 6) ⢠Spacers x2 (page 9) ⢠This operating instructions Speakers (S-ST330) box: ⢠Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x2) (page 9) ⢠Speaker cables x5 (page 9) ⢠Non-skid pads (small) x24 ( page 5, 6) ⢠Brackets x2 ( page 5, 6) ⢠Spiral wrap x2 (page 10) ⢠Screws x8 (page 5, 6) HTP-330.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 4 En Chapter 1 Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing the speakers. If the speakers are to be used in a stacked configuration, always use the provided brackets to secure them together (page 5, 6). Home theater sound setup Most 5.1 channel home theater systems are designed so that speakers are placed to surround the listenerâÂÂs position as shown in the illustration. Such designs, however, produce the undesirable effect of forcing the center speaker to be mounted above or below the television monitor, and require room for the surround speakers. The present system, however, features PioneerâÂÂs proprietary New Front Surround technology and Dual Center Speakers, using only two speaker positions (to right and left of television as shown in the illustration) in order to provide full home theater sound while greatly simplifying the issue of speaker placement. Front surround setup (recommended) This recommended method places the surround speakers in front, to simplify the issue of speaker placement in the room. The center speakers can be placed in independently in the center if desired. Center Center Front left Front left Front right Front right Surround left Surround left Surround right Surround right Bass Bass Center Center Front left Front left Front right Front right Surround left Surround left Surround right Surround right Bass Bass *When center speakers are placed in the center . Surround left Center Front left Listening position Listening position Center Front right Su rround right Receiver subwoofer Surround left Center Front left Front right Su rround right HTP-330.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 5 En English 1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of each of the front, center and surround speakers. The four large non-skid pads are for the receiver subwoofer (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker. 2 Stack the speakers and fix with the brackets. Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on the model label on the rear side to assist identification. Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers correctly. As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers from the bottom up in the order front speaker, center speaker, surround speaker. Align the bracket with the respective upper screw hole on the back of the front speaker, the two screw holes on the center speaker, and the bottom screw hole on the surround speaker, and fasten the screws securely. When placing the center speakers independently, stack the front speaker on the bottom and the surround speaker on top, then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes from the top of the bracket with the upper screw holes on the back of the speakers, and fasten the two securely. Caution ⢠Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped. 3 Connect the speaker system. Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 15) to complete your surround sound setup. Front, Center and Surround speakers Non-skid pads (small) x 24 Receiver subwoof er Non-skid pads (large) x 4 Front speaker Color indicator Model label Center speaker Surround speaker Left Blue White Green Gray Red Green Right Surround speaker Bracket Screw Center speaker Front speaker Bracket Screw Surround speaker Front speaker HTP-330.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 6 En Standard surround setup This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. The center speakers can be installed independently in the center if desired. 1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of each of the front, center and surround speakers. The four large non-skid pads are for the receiver subwoofer (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker. 2 (When mounting center speakers to right and left) Stack the speakers and fix with the bracket. Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on the model label on the rear side to assist identification. Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers correctly. As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers with the front speaker on the bottom and center speaker on top, then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes from the top of the bracket with the upper screw holes on the back of the speakers, and fasten the two securely. Caution ⢠Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped. 3 Connect the speaker system. Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 15) to complete your surround sound setup. Su rround left *When center speakers are placed in the center . Su rround right Center Center Front left Listening position Listening position Front right Receiver subwoofer Center Front left Front right Front, Center and Surround speakers Non-skid pads (small) x 24 Receiver subwoof er Non-skid pads (large) x 4 Front speaker Center speaker Left Green White Green Red Right Color indicator Model label Bracket Screw Center speaker Front speaker HTP-330.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Speaker Setup Guide 01 7 En English Wall mounting the speakers The front, center and surround speakers have a mounting hole which can be used to mount the speaker on the wall. Before mounting ⢠Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to mount the speakers on is strong enough to support them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls. ⢠Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws suitable for the wall material and support the weight of the speaker. Caution ⢠If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the wall, consult a professional for advice. ⢠Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or damage that result from improper installation. Additional notes on speaker placement ⢠Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV. ⢠When using the Front surround setup, separate the left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum effect. ⢠When using the Standard surround setup, install the surround speakers slightly above ear level for optimum effect. Precautions: ⢠When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV due to external shocks such as earthquakes, endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker. ⢠The front (x2), center (x2) and surround (x2) speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, depending on the installation location, color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this happens, turn the power switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker system away from the television set. ⢠The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor. Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close to the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Do not attach the receiver subwoofer to the wall or ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury. ⢠For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals. ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. 5 mm to 7 mm 5 mm 10 mm HTP-330.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 8 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Basic connections Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket. Note ⢠When using the display unit in a wall-mounted location, take full precautions to prevent the unit from accidentally falling. ⢠Screws and other fixtures for use in wall mounting are not included. WARNING ⢠Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents resulting from faulty assembly or installation, insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural disasters. MC ACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLA Y UNIT. SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDI O INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L AM loop antenna Display unit Receiver subw oofer 2 Display cable FM antenna 1 3 HTP-330.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 9 En English 1 Fasten the spacers to the display unit and connect. If the display unit is difficult to view, the spacers can be attached to allow changing of the viewing angle. Peel off the protective paper from the spacers and press the spacers onto the depressions on the bottom of the display unit. Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack on the receiver subwoofer. 2 Assemble the AM loop antenna. a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow. b. Clip the loop onto the stand. c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform step b after first securing the stand with screws. It is recommended that you determine the reception strength before securing the stand with the screws. 3 Connect the AM and FM antennas 1 . a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal 2 . For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; insert the wire, then release to secure. b. Push the FM antenna 3 plug onto the center pin of the FM antenna socket. 4 Connect each speaker. ⢠The front and surround speaker cables have a color- coded connector at one end and two bare wires at the other end. ⢠Since there is only one terminal to connect the two center speakers, you will need to use the supplied Y- cable for the connection. ⢠Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. ⢠Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the illustration can be identified by means of the color- coded indicator provided on the rear-surface model label. Match the color-coded wire with the color indicator on the model label, then insert the color- coded wire into the red ( ) side and the other wire into the black ( â ) side. ⢠When connecting the center speakers, connect the Y- cable dual end to the two center speakers in the same way. Note 1⢠Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit and receiver subwoofer. ⢠If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 19 or Connecting external antennas on page 23. ⢠Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 23. 2⢠DonâÂÂt let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. ⢠If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal. ⢠For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna. 3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit. a b c 2 1 Color-coded wire (Connect to speaker) Color-coded connector (Connect to rear panel) Y-cable To Receiver subwoofer HTP-330.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 10 En ⢠Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make sure to insert completely. The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug should face up or down depending on whether itâÂÂs being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly. ⢠When connections are completed, adjust the cable placements. If the speakers have been fixed with the brackets, fix the cable to the groove in the brackets as shown. ⢠Fasten the cables together with the spiral wrap. Hold multiple cables together and place the wrap over the cables from the end. Wrap the spiral wrap with the cables in the center. The spiral wrap may be cut at a desired length. 5 Connect the subwoofer cable. ⢠Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of center, you should see the subwoofer connecting cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER terminal. Caution ⢠These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts. ⢠Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. CON TROL OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC 7 To AC outlet Y-cable Receiver subw oofer 5 4 Speaker system Front right (Red) Center (Green) Surround right (Gray) Front left ( White) Center (Green) Surround left (Blue) Listening position Upper terminal Lower t erminal HTP-330.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 11 En English ⢠Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire. ⢠The center speakers and front/surround speakers are designed with different impedance values. Be sure to identify and connect the speakers correctly since improper connections may result in degraded sound or operation. 6 If you have a DVD player or other source 1 component you want to connect, connect it now before connecting the power cord in the next step. See Connecting auxiliary components on page 23 for how to connect a digital source component. 7 Connect the power cord. 2 ⢠Connect the power cord to AC inlet on the receiver subwoofer. Connect the power cord to a wall socket. Using this system for TV audio If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to this system and enjoy surround TV sound. Important ⢠When connecting this system, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. Connect the power cord to the wall socket only after completing all other connections. 1 Connect the audio output jacks on your TV to the ANALOG input jacks on the receiver subwoofer. Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for this connection. Make sure you match the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. ⢠You can use the ANALOG input jacks for any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc. Note 1 Make sure to connect a TV or monitor (for video sources) to take advantage of this systemâÂÂs home theater potential. Please refer to the instruction manual supplied with your TV or monitor for connection details. 2⢠Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system. ⢠Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system. To Audio output 1 SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTRO L IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUD IO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC TV DVR 2 TICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) ITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG R L HTP-330.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 12 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Display unit 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the system on/into standby. 2 Front panel display See below for details. 3 IR remote sensor (page 14) 4 AUDIO INPUT (page 23) Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs ( DVD/DVR1 , DVD/DVR2 , DIGITAL or ANALOG ). 5 SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 16). 6 VOLUME buttons Use to adjust the volume. Display 1 DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 16). 2 F.SURR. Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround Advance listening modes is selected (page 17). SURR. Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 17). 3 SOUND Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 17). 4 Tuner indicators (page 19) â Lights when a broadcast is being received. â Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode. â Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 5 kHz / MHz Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character display ( kHz for AM, MHz for FM). 6 Character display 7 Lights when sleep timer is active (page 26). 8 2 PL II Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 16). 9 2 D Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 16). 1 4 6 5 2 3 2 PL 2 D kHz MHz SOUND DTS F .SURR. 5 4 2 3 7 8 9 6 1 HTP-330.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 13 En English Remote control 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into standby. 2 MUTE Press to mute all audio from the speakers. Press again to cancel and restore the sound. 3 VOLUME /â Use to adjust the volume. 4 Input select buttons DVD/DVR1 â Press to select the DVD/DVR1 digital audio input. DVD/DVR2 â Press to select the DVD/DVR2 digital audio input. DIGITAL â Press to select the DIGITAL audio input. ANALOG â Press to select the ANALOG audio input. (page 23) FM/AM â Press to select the built-in radio tuner. (page 19) 5 Number buttons, CLEAR and ENTER Use the number buttons for entering radio stations directly, and so on. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. Use ENTER to confirm an entry. 6 SLEEP Press to set the sleep timer (page 26). 7 SETUP Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup, tuner settings and so on (page 15, 19, 20, 21, 26). 8 SR Use to setup the SR features and to select the SR mode (page 25). 9 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate the receiver subwoofer menus. 10 SOUND (page 18) Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust bass and treble, etc. 11 TEST TONE Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 22). 12 SOUND RETRIEVER Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed stereo audio sources (page 17). 13 SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 16). 14 ADVANCED Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode (page 17). 15 F.S.SURR Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 17). 16 MCACC Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 15). 17 TV CONTROL (page 27) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. TV CONTROL ST ANDBY/ON VOL UME MUTE TEST TONE SOUND SOUND RETRIEVER SURROUND CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT TV AD V ANCED F .S .SU RR MCACC SLEEP SETUP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST FM/AM D VD/D VR1 D VD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ENTER ENTER CLEAR RE CE IV ER RECEIVER 1 2 3 6 8 13 12 7 9 11 10 5 16 14 15 17 4 HTP-330.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 14 En Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit, as shown. Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Caution Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of battery together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. WARNING ⢠Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. 30 30 7 m HTP-330.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 15 En English Chapter 4 Getting started System demo setting Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this starts when you plug in for the first time). 1S witch the system into standby. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DEMO from the menu, then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER . Select from: ⢠DEMO ON â Switches the demo display on. ⢠DEMO OFF â Switches the demo display off and the system into standby. Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided, the system uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration EQ) for your particular room. 1 Important ⢠The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; however, do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub-optimal setup. ⢠Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup. 1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the rear panel. 2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position. Place the mic horizontally about ear level at your normal listening position using a table or chair. Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. 3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press î STANDBY/ ON to turn the power on. 4 Press MCACC . Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC . The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones. ⢠To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, press MCACC . The unit will continue to use the previous settings. ⢠If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in the display for five seconds. To exit and check the noise levels 2 , press MCACC , or to try again, press ENTER when RETRY shows in the display. ⢠If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the display, there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER when you see RETRY . 3 When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level returns to normal, COMPLETE 4 shows in the display, and Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated. 5 Note 1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout). ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP 2⢠If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. ⢠Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup. 3 If this doesnâÂÂt work, press MCACC , turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again. 4 If COMPLETE doesnâÂÂt appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again. 5 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 18 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ. V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE D VD/D VR1 DVD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ST ANDBY/ON TV INPUT CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOL U ME MCACC MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTRO L IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MC ACC SETUP MIC HTP-330.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 16 En Chapter 5 Listening to your system Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. If you set up the system for Front surround (page 4), the Front Surround modes will give the best results (see Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 17). ⢠Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening mode. If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D or DTS indicator lights. ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. Listening in surround sound You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes. If you set up the system for Front surround (page 4), the Front Surround modes will give the best results (see Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 17). ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode. ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D or DTS indicator lights. ⢠AUTO â Auto listening mode (see above) ⢠DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source ⢠MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources, for use with any two-channel source ⢠MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) â 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below ⢠STEREO â See Listening in stereo on page 17 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. 1W ith Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press SOUND . 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or PANORAMA then press ENTER . ⢠C WIDTH (Center Width) â Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings) ⢠DIMEN. (Dimension) â Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings) ⢠PANORAMA â Extends the front strereo image to include the surround speakers for a âÂÂwraparoundâ effect. 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 17 En English Using Front Stage Surround Advance The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as described on page 4. ⢠Press F.S.SURR to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode. Press repeatedly to select FOCUS5.1 , WIDE5.1 or EXTRAPWR . ⢠FOCUS5.1 â Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center area where the left and right speakersâ sound projection converges. ⢠WIDE5.1 â Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS5.1 mode. ⢠EXTRAPWR â Outputs stereo sound (in the case of multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound) from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect. Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects. These modes are designed to provide optimum listening effect when using the Standard surround setup described on page 6. ⢠Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select: ⢠ACTION â Suitable for action movies ⢠UNPLUGED â Suitable for acoustic musical sources ⢠EXPANDED â Wide sound field ⢠TV SURR. â Surround sound for mono or stereo TV broadcasts ⢠SPORTS â Suitable for sports programming ⢠ADV.GAME â Suitable for TV game units ⢠VIRTUAL â A virtual surround effect using just the subwoofer and front speakers. ⢠X-STEREO â Powerful surround sound for stereo music sources Listening in stereo You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannelâÂÂin stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display. ⢠You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. Using the Sound Retriever When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression. â¢W hile listening to a stereo source, press SOUND RETRIEVER . Press repeatedly to switch between: ⢠RTRV ON â Switches the Sound Retriever on. ⢠RTRV OFF â Switches the Sound Retriever off. ST TUNE ST ENTER TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME F. S . SURR ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME ADV ANCED ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SOUND RETRIEVER HTP-330.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 05 18 En Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound on page 15. 1 Press SOUND . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select MCACC EQ then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and speaker settings (channel delay and channel level) remains as it is set. ⢠Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used. Enhancing dialogue The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie sound track. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DIALOGUE then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the amount dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm. Select between OFF , MID or MAX . Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source. The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select TONE then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select QUIET or MIDNIGHT then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes, select BASS/TRE . Adjusting the bass and treble Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select TONE then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select BASS/TRE then press ENTER. ⢠Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the same time. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select BASS or TREBLE; use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm. Boosting the bass level There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the bass in a source. 1 Press SOUND . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select BASSMODE then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the sound then press ENTER to confirm. Select between OFF , MUSIC or CINEMA . ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 19 En English Chapter 6 Listening to the radio Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen. 1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band. The display shows the band and frequency. 2 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modes â manual, auto, and high- speed: ⢠Manual tuning â Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching. ⢠High-speed tuning â Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving poor FM reception If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. 1 Tune to an FM radio station then press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose FM MODE then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select FM MONO then press ENTER . The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Improving poor AM sound The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off. Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna. Changing the noise cut mode If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best. 1 Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose NOISECUT then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER . Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Tune to an FM or AM radio station. Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved along with the preset. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose ST.MEM. then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the station preset you want then press ENTER . Listening to station presets 1M ake sure the tuner function is selected. 2 Use the ST /â buttons to select a station preset. ⢠Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a preset directly. ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TON E SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR D VD/DVR1 D VD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP FM/AM HTP-330.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to the radio 06 20 En Changing the frequency step If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/ region. 1S witch the system into standby. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂAM 9K/10KâÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠AM 9K â 9 kHz step for AM; 50 kHz step for FM ⢠AM 10K â 10 kHz step for AM; 100 kHz step for FM HTP-330.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 21 En English Chapter 7 Surround sound settings Using the Setup menu From the Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system 1 , including channel levels, speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual mono audio playback. Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu. Channel level setting The Auto MCACC feature (see page 15) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo playback are independent of the settings for surround sound playback. A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 22 for more on this. 1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a source. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select CH LEVEL , then press ENTER . 4 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select a channel; îÂÂ/ î (cursor up/down) to adjust the level of that channel. ⢠You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. ⢠If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels. 5 Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Speaker distance setting The Auto MCACC feature (see page 15) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position. 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DISTANCE, then press ENTER . 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select a speaker; îÂÂ/ î (cursor up/down) to adjust the distance. Adjust the following speakers: ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠SR â Surround right speaker ⢠SL â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3 m to 9.0 m . 4 Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Dynamic Range Control When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low volume, low level sounds â including some of the dialogue â can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks. 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DRC, then press ENTER . Note 1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 19 and Additional information on page 26. ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound settings 07 22 En 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠DRC OFF (default) â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) ⢠DRC MID â Mid setting ⢠DRC HIGH â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) 4 Press ENTER to exit. Dual mono setting Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with bilingual audio. 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DUALMONO, then press ENTER . 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a setting. Select one of the following: ⢠CH1 MONO (default) â Only channel 1 is played ⢠CH2 MONO â Only channel 2 is played ⢠CH1/CH2 â Both channels are played through the front speakers 4 Press ENTER to exit. Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see Channel level setting on page 21). A test tone is played through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the level as it plays. Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources are independent of the settings for surround sound sources. 1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening mode. ⢠If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two channel) playback, select the STEREO listening mode. 2 Press TEST TONE . The test tone is output from each speaker in turn. 3W hile a test tone is playing, use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust that channel level. The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can adjust the level of each channel by ñ10 dB. ⢠You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the VOLUME /â buttons (this does not affect the channel level settings). ⢠If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels. ⢠Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source. See the method described in Channel level setting on page 21. 4W hen youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to exit test tone setup. ⢠If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOLUME SR ST TUNE TUNE ENTER TEST TONE SURROUND HTP-330.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 23 En English Chapter 8 Other connections Important ⢠When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket. Connecting auxiliary components The receiver subwoofer has several digital inputs for digital playback components, such as DVD, CD and MD players. ⢠Connect the digital output jack on your DVD player, etc. to one of the DIGITAL input jacks on the receiver subwoofer. Use a commercially available optical cable or supplied coaxial cable to make this connection. Connecting an analog audio component You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an analog audio component, such as a tape player. See Using this system for TV audio on page 11 for connection details (this explains connecting the audio output from your TV, but any analog audio component can be connected). Listening to an external audio source You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system. Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog sources include your TV. See also Connecting auxiliary components above. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ ON to switch on. Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on. 2 Select DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG to select the source for playback. These buttons correspond with the input jacks on the receiver subwoofer. 3 If necessary, start playback of the external source. Connecting external antennas For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl- insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the loop antenna connected. For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna. SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 MC ACC SETUP MIC DVD player , etc. To digital audio output (coaxial) To digital audio output (optical) or DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE FM/AM ST ANDBY/ON D VD/DVR1 DVD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CO NTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 Outdoor antenna external FM antenna external AM antenna Loop antenna P AL connector (5 m to 6 m) Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated Wire) HTP-330.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 24 En Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display If you have a Pioneer plasma display 1 , you can use an SR cable 2 to connect it to this unit and take advantage of various convenient features, such as controlling this unit via the plasma displayâÂÂs remote sensor, automatic video input switching of the plasma display, display unit messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and automatic volume muting on the plasma display. Important ⢠With an SR cable connected, the remote must now be pointed towards your plasma display rather than the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to control the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR cable to connect the CONTROL IN jack of this unit to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display. 3 Before you can use the extra SR features, you need to make a few settings in the unit â see SR Setup for Pioneer plasma displays below. SR Setup for Pioneer plasma displays Make the following settings if you have connected a Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR cable. 1 Press SR . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose SETUP, then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the setting. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings. 6 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the SR setup menu. Automatic plasma display volume muting When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwooferâÂÂs input function is changed to one that you would want to hear the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than the plasma display (DVD, for example). ⢠VOL.C ON â When this unit is switched on, or the input function is changed, the volume on the plasma display is muted so only sound from this unit is heard. ⢠VOL.C OFF â This unit does not control the volume of the plasma display Note 1 This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward. 2 The 3-ringed SR cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR cable. 3 You wonâÂÂt be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isnâÂÂt switched off. SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN CON TROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL A UDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC Pioneer plasma display CONTROL IN CONTROL OUT ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SR HTP-330.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 08 25 En English Automatic plasma display input switching In order that the plasma display can switch automatically to the correct input when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your system is connected. For example, if you connected your DVD player to the DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2 on your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here so that when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer to DV1 to watch your DVD player, the plasma display will automatically switch to input 2. For each receiver subwoofer input function ( DV1 (DVD/ DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA (ANALOG)) you can select: ⢠NONE â does not switch the plasma display input ⢠PDP1 to PDP7 â switches the plasma display input to one of the numbered inputs. (Note that the number displayed may vary depending on the plasma display to which you connect this unit.) ⢠TVTN â switches the plasma display to its built-in TV tuner Note ⢠Note that certain PDP inputs (ex. PDP7 ) may be referred to on your plasma display as âÂÂPC InputâÂÂ. ⢠The SR setting remains in effect even in standby. ⢠The SR setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner function. Using the SR mode with a Pioneer plasma display 1 Press SR on the remote. 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select SR ON then press ENTER. ⢠The SR setting is maintained even after switching the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on. Automatic muting and input switching will be effective when the receiver subwoofer is switched on. ⢠If you disconnect the SR cable or switch the plasma display off while SR is on, the SR ON setting remains. ⢠To switch to SR OFF , follow steps 1 and 2 , selecting SR OFF . Note ⢠You can control this unit with the plasma displayâÂÂs remote sensor even in standby, but you canâÂÂt control this unit with either this unitâÂÂs remote sensor or the plasma displayâÂÂs remote sensor when the plasma display is switched off (AC off) and the SR cable is connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit. About control out connections Many Pioneer components support SR CONTROL connections, by which you can use the remote controls of any connected components by aiming them at the sensor of just one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component. If you choose to use this feature, you must make sure that you also have at least one set of analog or coaxial digital audio jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes. ⢠Using a cable with mono mini-plugs on either side (sold separately), connect the CONTROL IN jack on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT jack on the receiver subwoofer. This will allow you to control the other component (such as a DVD recorder in a cabinet) by pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this receiver subwoofer. ⢠You can also connect this receiver subwoofer to your plasma display as described above, in which case you should point the remote at the plasma display to control your DVD player, receiver subwoofer, and plasma display. HTP-330.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 26 En Chapter 9 Additional information Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. 1 1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option. Choose between the following options: ⢠SLP ON â Switches off after about an hour ⢠SLP OFF â Cancels the sleep timer After selecting SLP ON , you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left. Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes (remaining): Dimming the display You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright. 2 1 Press SETUP . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select DIMMER then press ENTER . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select LIGHT or DARK then press ENTER . DTS CD setting If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change this setting to hear the decoded signal. 1S witch the system into standby. 2 Press SETUP . 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select CD TYPE from the menu, then press ENTER . 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER . Select from: ⢠NORMAL â Use for playback of regular audio CDs. Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when played. ⢠DTS-CD â Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be skipped. Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default. 1S witch the system on. 2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the î STANDBY/ON button on the display unit. The next time you switch on, all the system settings should be reset. Note 1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. 2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting. ST TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SLEEP SR SLEEP SL P --- -- ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 27 En English Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack . DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the system unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unitâÂÂs feet. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page. 1 Switch on your TV. 2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 3 Point the remote towards your TV and press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 2 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND V OLUME SETUP TEST TON E CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC AD V ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOL UME SR FM/AM D VD/DVR1 D VD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT CHANNEL VOL UME HTP-330.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 28 En Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) Manufacturer Code(s) ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656, 668 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646, 669, 670 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627, 667 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIDEN 671 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 HTP-330.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 29 En English Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. ⢠For audio-related problems, please also check the settings of the audio playback device. See the operating instructions for the device for detailed information. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on, or switches off suddenly (an error message may be displayed at startup). ⢠Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on. ⢠Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. ⢠Check that the speakers are connected correctly. ⢠Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer. ⢠Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model. ⢠Try reducing the volume level. ⢠If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. No sound is output when an input function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 23). ⢠Turn up the volume. ⢠Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off. No sound from surround or center speakers. ⢠Refer to Channel level setting on page 21 to check the speaker levels. ⢠Check that you havenâÂÂt selected the AUTO , STEREO , or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 16). ⢠Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up). CanâÂÂt operate using the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries ( Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 14). ⢠Operate within 7 m, 30ð of the remote sensor ( Using the remote control on page 14). ⢠Remove any obstacles or operate from another position . ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. ⢠F or operating the other P ioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this receiver subwoofer , make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable or at least one set of analog audio cables are connected. (page 25) ⢠If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a P ioneer plasma display with an SR cable, check that the plasma display is switched on. P oint the remote control at the plasma display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer . ⢠Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack. HTP-330.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 30 En Tuner Error Messages Glossary Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up ) and adjust the direction and position for best reception. Y ou may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 23). ⢠F ully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. Y ou may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 23). ⢠T urn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away . ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your countr y or region. See Changing the frequency step on page 20 to switch the tuning inter val. Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. F or more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. Message Description 2CH ONL Y ⢠An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the current source is a multichannel source. 96K ⢠An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital. MUTING ⢠An operation is prohibited because the sound is muted (press MUTE ). EXIT ⢠Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity . NOISY ⢠Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully . ERR MIC ⢠An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly . ERR SP ⢠An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are not connected properly . EEP ERROR ⢠Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. NO SPTYP ⢠T r y switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a P ioneer authorized ser vice center or your dealer . Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. Dolby Pro Logic II A matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories that expands any two-channel source audio, such as CDs and TV broadcasts, to a five-channel playback (left/center/right/left surround/right surround), resulting in a surround experience. DTS A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by DTS that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. HTP-330.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 09 31 En English Specifications SX-SW330 Audio Multi-channal Receiver Subwoofer â¢A mplifier section RMS Power Output: Front, Center, Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 ⦠) Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 ⦠) â¢F M tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced â¢A M tuner section Frequency range With 9 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz With 10 kHz step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna ⢠Subwoofer section Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex floor type System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W â¢M iscellaneous Power requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W Dimensions . . . . . 200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 428 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg ⢠Accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) . . . . . . . . . 2 Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 This operating instructions S-ST330 Speaker system (Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speakers x2) ⢠Front/surround speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠Center speakers Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Dimensions . . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠Accessories Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Non-skid pads (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Spiral wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Note ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. HTP-330.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_ChH 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm HTP-330.book Page 2 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
ç®é 3 ChH ä¸Âæ ç®é 01 æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå è¨Âç½®æÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æªæ½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ã¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® ï¼Â建è°使ç¨＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨åºå®Âæ¼çÂÂ丠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 åºå®Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 éÂÂæ¼æÂÂè²å¨æºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02 æ¥締åºæŽ£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 使ç¨æ¤系統ä½Âçºé»è¦Âé³æÂÂ輸åº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 03 æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 è£Âå ¥éÂÂæ§å¨é»池. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 04 éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂ你系統å±Â示è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æ . . . . . . . . . 15 05 使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 以ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂèÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 使ç¨åÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 使ç¨ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 å 強å°Âç½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 使ç¨ ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂå ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 調æ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 å éÂÂä½Âé³é³é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 06 æ¶è½廣æ æ¶è½廣æ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¹å FM æÂ¥æ¶ä¸Âè¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¹å AM é³æÂÂä¸Âä½³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 è¨Âæ¶éÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 07 ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 使ç¨ ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 使ç¨測試é³調æ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 08 å ¶ä»Âæ¥締é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³æÂÂä¾Â溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 å°Âæ¤è£Âç½®é£æÂ¥å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç SR è¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 å° SR 模å¼ÂèÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨æÂÂé Â使ç¨ . . . . . . . . . 25 éÂÂæ¼æ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 09 å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 DTS CD è¨Âå®Âå¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 éÂÂè¨Â系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 使ç¨é»è¦ÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂéµ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 é Âè¨Â代碼表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ä¸Âè¬ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 è©Âå½Â表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 è¦Âæ ¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 å è£Â箱堧容ç© è«Â確èªÂå è£Â箱堧æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  ç®çÂÂç©åÂÂã æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼ SX-SW330 ï¼Âå è£Â箱＠⢠éÂÂæ§å¨ ï¼Â第 13 é Â＠⢠AA/R6 ä¹¾é»池ï¼Â以便æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæ§å¨＠x2 ï¼Â第 14 é Â＠⢠顯示è£Âç½® ï¼Â第 12 é Â＠⢠é»æºÂç· x2 ï¼Â第 11 é Â＠⢠AM 迴路天締ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠顯示é£æ¥締ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠åÂÂ軸é»締ï¼Â第 23 é Â＠⢠麥å Â風 ï¼Âä¾Âèªå MCACC è¨Â置＠ï¼Â第 15 é Â＠⢠é²æ»Â墠ï¼Â大＠x4 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Â＠⢠å¢Âå¡ x2 ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠æ¾ÂÂä½Â說æ æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ S-ST330 ï¼Âå è£Â箱＠⢠æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½® x2 ãÂÂç°繠x2 ãÂÂä¸Âç½® x2 ï¼ ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠æÂÂè²å¨é£æ¥締x5 ï¼Â第 9 é Â＠⢠é²æ»Â墠ï¼Âå°Âï¼ x24 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Â＠⢠æ¯æ¶ x2 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Â＠⢠çºÂç¹Â管 x2 ï¼Â第 10 é Â＠⢠èº絲 x8 ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Âï¼ HTP-330.book Page 3 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 4 ChH 第 1 ç« æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå è¨Âç½®æÂÂæÂÂ注æÂÂçÂÂå®Âå ¨æªæ½ çµÂè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨æ ＠è«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨平æ¾以å Âç¼çÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå· ãÂÂè« åÂÂå¿ å¨平穩çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂçµÂè£ÂãÂÂè¨Âç½®èÂÂæºæ¾ã å¦ÂæÂÂ使ç¨å ÂçÂÂçÂÂæºè¨Âæ¹å¼Â使ç¨æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠使ç¨é¨é çÂÂæ¯æ¶å°Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºå®Âå¨ä¸Âèµ· ï¼Â第 5 ï¼ 6 é Âï¼ ã 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂè¨Âç½® 大å¤Âæ¸ç 5.1 è²éÂÂ家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢系統æ¯éÂÂå°Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æºè¨Âå¨ å¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示çÂÂç°ç¹ÂèÂÂè½è ä½Âç½®èÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂãÂÂéÂÂé¡Âè¨Âè¨ÂæÂÂ使è£Âå¨ é»è¦Âè¢å¹Âä¸Âæ¹æÂÂä¸Âæ¹çÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¢çÂÂä¸Âæ³è¦ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼ èÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæºè¨Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ空éÂÂã ç® Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂç³» çµ± Ã¥ÂÂè½ç¹ è²å æ¬ å ÂéÂÂç¹ æÂÂçÂÂæ° å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç° ç¹ æÂÂè¡Âè é éÂÂä¸Âç½® æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Âå 使ç¨ å ©åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示 çÂÂé»覠å³å´èÂÂå·¦å´＠æÂÂä¾Âå®Âæ´çÂÂ家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æ ＠åÂÂæÂÂ大幠æ¸Âå°Âæ è²å¨çÂÂæºè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âã åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® ï¼Â建è°使ç¨＠éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°æ¹æ³Âå°Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨æ¾å¨åÂÂé¢ ï¼ ç°¡åÂÂäºÂæÂÂè²å¨å¨æ¿ éÂÂä¸Âç æºè¨Âå é¡ÂãÂÂ丠置æÂÂè² å¨å¯以 è¦ÂéÂÂ覠å® ç¨æº訠å¨丠央ã ä¸Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å·¦ç°繠左ç°繠å³ç°繠å³ç°繠ä½Âé³ ä½Âé³ ä¸Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å·¦ç°繠左ç°繠å³ç°繠å³ç°繠ä½Âé³ ä½Âé³ * ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ¾å¨ä¸Â央ã 左ç°繠ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³ç°繠æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ å·¦ç°繠ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® å³ç°繠HTP-330.book Page 4 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 5 ChH ä¸Âæ 1 å°Âè¼Âå°ÂçÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âé»Âè²¼æ¼æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ã ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂåºÂé¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ大åÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âç¨æ¼æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ示＠ã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»Âæ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂ座 ï¼Âå¹³é¢＠ã 2 å ÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨並使ç¨æ¯æ¶åºå®Âã 毠åÂÂæÂÂè² å¨èÂÂé¢ ç åÂÂèÂÂ樠籤ä¸Âé½ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå© èÂÂå¥ç 顠è²編碼 æÂÂ示ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é¡Âè²æÂÂ示並æ£確å®Âè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã å¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示ï¼Âä¾ÂåºÂç±ä¸Âå¾Âä¸Âå ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè² å¨ãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂå°ÂæºÂæ¯æ¶èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨èÂÂé¢çÂÂä¸Âå´èº çµ²åÂÂãÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂå ©åÂÂèº絲åÂÂãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂé¨èº çµ²åÂÂ並ç¢ç¢å°åºå®Âèº絲ã å®ç¨æºè¨Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨ä¸Âæ¹ ï¼Âç°繠æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨ä¸Âæ¹ ï¼ ç¶å¾Âå°ÂæºÂæ¯æ¶é Â端çÂÂ第 1 Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ第 3 å èº絲åÂÂèÂÂæÂÂè²å¨èÂÂé¨çÂÂä¸Âå´èº絲å ＠ç¶å¾Âç¢ç¢å°åºå®ÂéÂÂå © é¡Âèº絲ã 注æ â¢ 使ç¨æ¯æ¶é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠è«Âå¿ç¨æÂÂæ¿èÂÂå®Âå ãÂÂå¦åÂÂå¯ è½æÂÂå°Âè´æ¯æ¶æÂÂ壠ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè½æ´æÂÂé æÂÂæ¯æ¶åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨å´ éÂÂæÂÂå£Âã 3 æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç·Âã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æ¥締以便æ£確é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾ ï¼Âè«Âä¾Â砧丠åÂÂæÂÂ示å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂãÂÂå®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å¾Âï¼ è«Âå·è¡Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ( 第 15 é  ) ï¼Âå®ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂç è¨Âç½®ã åÂÂç½®ãÂÂä¸Âç½®ãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Âå°Âï¼ x 24 æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Â大＠x 4 Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ é¡Âè²æÂÂ示 Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤 ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ å·¦ èÂÂè² ç½è² 綠è² ç°è² ç´ è² 綠è² å³ ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ æ¯æ¶ èº絲 ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ æ¯æ¶ èº絲 ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ HTP-330.book Page 5 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 6 ChH æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½® æ¤çºæ¨ÂæºÂå¤Âè²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½® ï¼ é©ç¨æ¼ 5.1 è²éÂÂç 家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢é³æÂÂã ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å¯以è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Âå®ç¨å®Âè£Âå¨ä¸Â央ä½Âç½®ã 1 å°Âè¼Âå°ÂçÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âé»Âè²¼æ¼æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ã ä¸Âç½®èÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ çÂÂåºÂé¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ大åÂÂé²æ»Âå¢Âç¨æ¼æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ï¼Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ示＠ã è«Â使ç¨é²æ»Âå¢ÂæÂÂé»Âæ§çÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè²¼ä¸Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂåºÂ座 ï¼Âå¹³é¢＠ã 2 ï¼Âå°Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨è£Âå¨å³å´ Ã¥ÂÂå·¦å´æÂÂï¼Âå ÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨並使 ç¨æ¯æ¶åºå®Âã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ è²å¨è é¢çÂÂå èÂÂæ¨Â籤 丠é½æÂÂå å©èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ çÂÂé¡Âè² 編碼 æÂÂ示ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é¡Âè²æÂÂ示並æ£確å®Âè£ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã å¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示 ï¼ å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨åºÂé¨ä¸Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å ÂçÂÂå¨ ä¸Âæ¹ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°ÂæºÂæ¯æ¶é Â端çÂÂ第 1 Ã¥ÂÂ第 3 Ã¥ÂÂèº絲åÂÂèÂÂæÂÂè² å¨èÂÂé¨çÂÂä¸Âå´èº絲åÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¢ç¢å°åºå®ÂéÂÂå ©é¡Âèº絲ã 注æ â¢ 使ç¨æ¯æ¶é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠è«Âå¿ç¨æÂÂæ¿èÂÂå®Âå ãÂÂå¦åÂÂå¯ è½æÂÂå°Âè´æ¯æ¶æÂÂ壠ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè½æ´æÂÂé æÂÂæ¯æ¶åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨å´ éÂÂæÂÂå£Âã 3 æÂÂè²å¨系統æÂ¥ç·Âã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æ¥締以便æ£確é£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾ ï¼Âè«Âä¾Â砧丠åÂÂæÂÂ示å®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂãÂÂå®Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å¾Âï¼ è«Âå·è¡Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ( 第 15 é  ) ï¼Âå®ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂç è¨Âç½®ã 左ç°繠* ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ¾å¨ä¸Â央ã å³ç°繠ä¸Âç½® ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® å³åÂÂç½® æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ ä¸Âç½® å·¦åÂÂç½® å³åÂÂç½® Ã¥ÂÂç½®ãÂÂä¸Âç½®ãÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Âå°Âï¼ x 24 æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ é²æ»Âå¢Âï¼Â大＠x 4 Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ å·¦ 綠è² ç½è² 綠è² ç´ è² å³ é¡Âè²æÂÂ示 Ã¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤 æ¯æ¶ èº絲 ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ HTP-330.book Page 6 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂå 01 7 ChH ä¸Âæ å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨åºå®Âæ¼çÂÂ丠åÂÂç½® ã ä¸Âç½®åÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂåºå®Âå ï¼Âå¯ç¨æ¼å°ÂæÂÂè²å¨åº宠æ¼çÂÂä¸Âã åºå®Âå â¢ è«Âè¨Âä½Âï¼ÂæÂÂè²å¨系統éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âè¼Âï¼Âå¯è½使èº絲é¬Âè«æÂÂå çÂÂå£ÂæÂÂæÂÂç¡æ³Âæ¯æÂÂå ¶éÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂå°Âè´æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂè½ ãÂÂè«Â確 å®ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂçÂÂçÂÂå£Âå¯æ¯æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ãÂÂè«Âå¿å®Âè£Âæ¼ 夾æ¿æÂÂæÂÂè»ÂçÂÂçÂÂå£Â表é¢ã â¢ 换åÂÂæªé¨éÂÂåºå®Âç¨çÂÂèº絲ã è«Â使ç¨é©åÂÂçÂÂå£ÂæÂÂæÂÂ並 å¯æ¯æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨éÂÂéÂÂçÂÂèº絲ã 注æ â¢ èÂ¥ä¸Â確å®ÂçÂÂå£ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質堠åºèÂÂå¦ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Âæ¥Â人å¡å°Âæ±Â建 è°ã â¢ å ÂéÂÂå°Âæ¼任 ä½ å ä¸Âç¶å®Â裠æ å¼Âèµ·ä¹ÂæÂÂå¤Âæ æ 害æ¦Â丠負責ã éÂÂæ¼æÂÂè²å¨æºè¨ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Â注æÂÂäºÂ頠⢠å°Â主è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂå·¦å³æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨èÂÂé»è¦ÂçÂÂè·Âä¹ÂèÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½®æÂÂï¼Â使左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢素1.5 m 以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½®æÂÂï¼ è«Âå°Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âå¨ç¨Â微髠æ¼è³æµçÂÂä½Â置以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³æÂÂæÂÂã å®Âå ¨é Âç¥＠⢠å°Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âæ¼é»è¦Âä¸Âæ¹æ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠使ç¨è 帶æ 堶 ä»Âé©ç¶ ç 工 å · å° å ¶ åº å®ÂãÂÂå¦åÂÂæ è² å¨ å¯ è½ å çº夠åÂÂï¼Âå¦Âå°éÂÂèÂÂæÂÂè½ï¼Âå èÂÂå°Âé±éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é æÂÂå±éªæ æÂÂ害ã â¢ æ¤系統é¨éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½® ï¼ x2 ï¼ ãÂÂä¸Âç½® ï¼ x2 ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç°繠＠x2 ï¼ æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂé²ç£ÂèÂÂçÂÂãÂÂç¶èÂÂï¼Âè¦Âå®Âè£Âä½Âç½®ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂ¥ æÂÂè²å¨å®Âè£Âä½Âç½®éÂÂæ¼æÂ¥è¿Âé»è¦Âè¢å¹Âï¼ åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂè² 彩失çÂÂç æ æ³Âã èÂÂ¥ ç¼çÂÂæ¤æ 泠＠è«Âå ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»覠橠é» æºÂï¼ 15 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂè³ 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå¾Âå¨éÂÂæ°éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥æ æ³Âä»Âæªæ¹ Ã¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨系統é é¢é»è¦Âæ©Âã â¢ æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³æªç¶ÂéÂÂé²ç£ÂèÂÂç ï¼Âå æ¤è«Âé¿å Âæ¾å¨é»è¦Âæ© æÂÂç£è¦Âå¨å¨å ãÂÂå«ç£Âæ§çÂÂå²åÂÂåªÂä»Âï¼Âå¦Âç£Âç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂéÂÂé³ 帶æÂÂéÂÂ影帶ï¼Âä¹ÂæÂÂé é¢æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ã â¢ è«Âå¿å°ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³å®Âè£Âæ¼çÂÂå£ÂæÂÂ天è±æ¿ã å¦åÂÂå¯è½æ è½並é æÂÂ人å¡åÂÂå·ã â¢ çºå®Â堨起è¦Âï¼ è«Â確å®ÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂå¤Âæ²ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âæªå è¦Âç æÂÂè²å¨é»ç·Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æ¥堶ä»Âæ´大å¨ ãÂÂå¦åÂÂå¯è½é æ æ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æ¥堶ä»Âæ¤系統å¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã 5 mm è³ 7 mm 5 mm 10 mm HTP-330.book Page 7 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 8 ChH 第 2 ç« æ¥締åºæŽ£æÂÂ¥ éÂÂ覠⢠å°Âæ¤系統é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂè®Âæ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂï¼Â並å°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ã å®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã åÂÂ註 ⢠å¨çÂÂå£Âå®Âè£Âé¨ä½Âä¸Â使ç¨顯示å¨æÂÂï¼ è«Âæ¡åÂÂå®Âæ´çÂÂé Âé² æªæ½以é²è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂè½ã â¢ æ¬è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ並æª æ ä¾ÂçÂÂå£Âå®Â裠æ ç¨çÂÂèº絲åÂÂå ¶ ä» å®Âè£Â頠件ã è¦å â¢ å ÂéÂÂå° æ¼ ä»»ä½Âå é¯誤çµÂ裠æ å®Âè£Âã ç å£Âåºå®Â強度 丠足ãÂÂåºå®Âè£Âå ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â建æÂÂï¼ ãÂÂä¸Âç¶使ç¨æÂÂ天ç½æÂÂé æÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂå¤Âï¼Âæ¦Âä¸Â負責ã MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CO NTROL IN CO NTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLA Y UNIT. SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDI O INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L AM 迴路天締顯示è£Âç½® 2 顯示é£æ¥締FM 天締1 3 HTP-330.book Page 8 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 9 ChH ä¸Âæ 1 åºå®Â顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂå¢Âå¡Â並é£æÂ¥ã å¦ÂæÂÂå¾Âé£çÂÂå°顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂç«é¢ ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å®Âè£Âå¢Âå¡Â以è®Âæ´觠çÂÂè§Â度ã æÂÂä¸Âå¢Âå¡ÂçÂÂé²è·ç´Âï¼Âç¶å¾Âå°Âå¢Âå¡ÂæÂÂ堥顯示è£Â置庠é¨çÂÂå¹åÂÂå §ã å°Â顯示å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âç L Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂç·£æÂÂ堥顯示è£Âç½®å¾Âæ¹çÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼ ç¶ å¾Âå°Â顯示å¹Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå¦ä¸Â端æÂÂå ¥æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç SYSTEM CONNECTOR æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 çµÂ裠AM 迴路天ç·Âã a. ä¾Âç®Âé ÂæÂÂ示æ¹åÂÂå½Âæ²æ¯æ¶ã b. å°Â迴路夾å¨æ¯æ¶ä¸Âã c. èÂ¥è¦Âåºå®Âå¨ç 壠æÂÂå ¶ä»Â表é¢ ä¸Âï¼Â堠以 èº絲åº å® æ¯ æ¶ å¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå·è¡Âæ¥驠b ã æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°æ¨以èº絲åºå®Âæ¯æ¶åÂÂï¼Âå Â確èªÂæÂ¥æ¶強度ã 3 é£æÂÂ¥ AM å FM 天締1 ã a. å° AM 迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âæ¢Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥å°æ¯Âå AM 天締端åÂÂ丠2 ã æÂÂä¸Âå¡èÂÂ便å¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ端åÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂå ¥é»ç·Âï¼Âé¬ÂéÂÂå¡è 便å¯å°Âé»ç·Â夾ä½Âåºå®Âã b. å° FM 天締3 æÂÂé Âæ¨堥 FM 天ç·ÂæÂÂ槽çÂÂä¸Â央æ¥蠳ã 4 é£æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂç½® å ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é£ æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂå ¶ä¸Â丠端 é½æÂÂå«é¡Âè² 代 碼çÂÂæÂ¥é Âï¼Âå¦ä¸Â端åÂÂæÂÂå ©æ¢Â裸ç·Âã â¢ ç±æ¼åªæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ端åÂÂå¯以é£æ¥堩åÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨＠å æ¤æ¨ å¿ é Â使ç¨é¨éÂÂç Y é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥ã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂ並æÂÂåºæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»ç·ÂçÂÂä¿Âè·層ã â¢ å°Âé»ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂÂè²å¨丠ãÂÂ使ç¨å¾Â表é¢åÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸ÂæÂÂä¾ çÂÂé¡Âè²代碼å¯以èÂÂå¥åÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ãÂÂæ¯Âå°Âé¡Âè² 代碼ç·ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæ¨Â籤ä¸Âé¡Âè²æÂÂ示＠ç¶å¾Âå°Âé¡Âè²代碼ç·Âæ 堥素è² ï¼ ï¼Â端ï¼Âå¦ä¸Âæ¢Âç·ÂæÂÂå ¥é»Âè² ï¼ â ï¼Â端ã â¢ é£æÂ¥ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨æ ＠使ç¨ç¸åÂÂæ¹å¼Âå° Y é£æÂ¥ç·ÂéÂÂéÂÂ端 é£æÂ¥å°堩åÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ã éÂÂ註 1 ⢠è«Âå°Â天ç·Âé é¢堶ä»Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂãÂÂ顯示è£Â置以åÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ã â¢ èÂ¥é¨éÂÂ天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥æ¶è¨ÂèÂÂä¸Âè¯ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 19 é Âç æ¹å FM æÂ¥æ¶ä¸Âè¯ 以å æ¹å AM é³æÂÂä¸Âä½³ ï¼ÂæÂÂ第 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締ã â¢ ä¸Âå¯å®Âè£Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂ迴路天ç·Â以å¤ÂçÂÂ天ç·Âï¼ÂæÂÂå¦Â第 23 é ÂæÂÂè¿°çÂÂå¤Âæ¥天ç·Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使天ç·Âæ¥觸éÂÂ屬ç©é«Âï¼Â並é¿å Âå°Âå ¶å®Âç½®å¨é»蠦ãÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂȌ¨ç¨åÂÂéÂÂè¿Âã â¢ èÂ¥ç¡ç·ÂéÂȾ¶è¨Âä¸Âè¯ï¼Âå¯éÂÂæ°å°Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âé»ç·Âè£Âè³ç¸åÂÂçÂÂ端åÂÂ以æ±Âæ¹åÂÂã â¢ çºéÂÂæÂÂä½³æ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Âå¿尠AM 迴路天ç·Âé»ç·ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âå ¶ç¹Âå¨迴路天ç·Âå¨åÂÂã 3 çº確ä¿ÂæÂÂä½³æ¶è¨Âï¼Âè«Â確宠FM 天ç·Âå®Âå ¨å±ÂéÂÂï¼Âä¸ÂæªçºÂç¹ÂæÂÂæ¸æÂÂæ¼è£Âç½®å¾Âæ¹ã a b c 2 1 é¡Âè²代碼締ï¼Âé£æÂ¥å°æÂÂè²å¨＠é¡Âè²代碼æ¥頠ï¼Âé£æÂ¥å°å¾Âé¢æ¿＠Y é£æ¥締è³æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ HTP-330.book Page 9 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 10 ChH ⢠å°Âå¦ä¸Â端æÂÂ¥ 丠æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ å¾ æ¹æÂÂé¡Âè²代碼 ç æÂÂè²å¨ 端åÂÂãÂÂè«Â確å®Âå°Âé»ç·Âå®Âå ¨æÂÂå ¥ã æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂé Âé»ç·Â端çÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¹åÂÂçºæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸Âï¼ÂéÂÂ覠é»ç·ÂæÂÂå ¥ä¸Âæ¹æÂÂä¸Âæ¹æÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂèÂÂå®ÂãÂÂè«Â確å®Âæ¥締æ£確ã â¢ å®ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂÂï¼Â調æ´é£æÂ¥ç·Âä½Âç½®ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨以æ¯æ¶åº å®Âï¼Âè«Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âåºå®Âå¨æ¯æ¶çÂÂæºÂ槽ä¸Âã â¢ 使ç¨çºÂç¹Â管å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âåºå®Âå¨ä¸Âèµ·ã å°Âå¤Âæ¢Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âåºå®Âå¨ä¸Âèµ·ï¼ ç¶å¾Âå¾Âé£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂæ«端éÂÂ姠å ä¸ÂçºÂç¹Â管ã å ä¸ÂçºÂç¹Â管ï¼Â並å°Âé£æÂ¥ç·Âæ¾å¨ä¸Â央ã çºÂç¹Â管å¯以åÂÂå²å°æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé·度ã 5 é£æÂ¥éÂÂä½Âé³æÂ¥ç·Âã â¢ éÂÂä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨æ£ä¸Âæ¹ï¼Âè³ä¸ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå·¦ï¼Âå°±æ¯éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé£ æ¥締ã è«Âå°Âæ¤é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂå ¥ SUBWOOFER SPEAKER 端 Ã¥ÂÂã 注æ â¢ éÂÂäºÂæÂÂè²å¨端åÂÂå¯è½å« å±éªé»壠ãÂÂçºé¿å Âæ¼é£æÂ¥æÂÂæ é¤æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂç¼çÂÂ觸éÂȍÂÂå±éª＠æ¥觸任ä½ÂæªçµÂç·£ é¶件åÂÂï¼Âè«Âå ÂæÂÂé¤é»æºÂç·Âã â¢ è«Âå¿é£æÂ¥æ¤系統å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂè²å¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æ¤系統以å¤ÂçÂÂæ´大å¨ ãÂÂèÂ¥é£ æ¥堶ä»Âæ´大å¨å¯è½å°Âè´æ éÂÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½ã â¢ ä¸Âç½® æ è²å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½® î¿ ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨æ¯ 以 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂȾ å¼ è¨Â訠ã è«Â確å®Âæ£確èÂÂå¥èÂÂé£æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ï¼Âå çºä¸Âç¶çÂÂé£ æÂ¥æ¹å¼Âå¯è½å°Âè´è²é³æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè®Âå·®ã SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. CONTROL OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MC ACC SETUP MIC 7 è³ AC é»æºÂæÂÂ座 Y é£æ¥締5 4 æÂÂè²å¨系統 å³åÂÂç½® ï¼Âç´ è²＠ä¸Âç½® ï¼Â綠è²＠å³ç°繠ï¼Âç°è²＠左åÂÂç½® ï¼Âç½è²＠ä¸Âç½® ï¼Â綠è²＠左ç°繠ï¼ÂèÂÂè²＠èÂÂè½ä½Âç½® ä¸Âæ¹端å ä¸Âæ¹端å HTP-330.book Page 10 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¥締02 11 ChH ä¸Âæ 6 èÂ¥æÂÂå ¶ä»Âè¦Âé£æÂ¥ç DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨æÂÂå½±é³ä¾Â溠1 è£Âç½® ï¼ è« å Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ï¼Âç¨Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂã éÂÂæ¼é£æÂ¥æ¸ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂè£Âç½®çÂÂæ¹å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥é 屬è£Âç½® ã 7 æÂ¥ä¸Âé»æºÂç·Âã 2 ⢠å°Âé»æºÂç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç AC é»æºÂæÂÂå£ãÂÂå°Âé»溠ç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂå£Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã 使ç¨æ¤系統ä½Âçºé»è¦Âé³æÂÂ輸åº èÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼Â便å¯å°Âé»è¦ÂèÂÂæ¤系統é£æ¥＠享åÂÂé»è¦Âç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã éÂÂ覠⢠å°Âæ¤系統é²è¡ÂæÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂï¼Â並å°Âé»æºÂç· æ é Âèªç 丠é» 溠æ 座 丠æÂÂé¤ãÂÂåªæ å¨ å® æ æ æ é£æÂÂ¥ å¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂå¯以å°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂå ¥çÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã 1 å°Âé»è¦Âä¸ÂçÂÂé³æÂÂ輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å°æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç ANALOG 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨素î¿ç½ ç«Âé«Âè² é³æÂÂé£ æ¥締ï¼Âæªé¨ éÂÂï¼Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ãÂÂ諠確å®Âå·²å°Âå·¦å³堩éÂÂ輸åºæÂ¥é Âè³ç¸æÂÂçÂÂ輸堥 ＠以便ç¢çÂÂæ£確 çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂã â¢ æ¨å¯以使ç¨ ANALOG 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥å¡帶çÂÂä»»ä½Âé¡Â毠ä¾ÂæºÂã éÂÂ註 1 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ é£æÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨ ï¼ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè¦Âè¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼ ï¼Â以便ç¼æ®æ¤系統çÂÂ家åºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢åÂÂè½ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯示å¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂå ï¼ÂäºÂ解é£æÂ¥çÂÂ詳細 è³Âè¨Âã 2 ⢠è«Âå¿使ç¨æ¬系統é¨éÂÂ以å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âé»æºÂç·Âã â¢ é¤é£æÂ¥æ¬系統å¤Âï¼Âè«Âå¿å°Âé¨éÂÂçÂÂé»æºÂç·Âä½Âçº堶ä»Âç¨éÂÂ使ç¨ã è³é³æÂÂ輸åº端å 1 SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN CON TROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC é»è¦Âæ© DVR 2 TICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) ITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG R L HTP-330.book Page 11 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 12 ChH 第 3 ç« æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 顯示è£Âç½® 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統é»æºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æ¿顯示 詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 3I R éÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ ï¼Â第 14 é Âï¼ 4 AUDIO INPUT ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ åÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Âæ¤æÂÂéµ便å¯é¸æÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé¨é³æÂÂ輸堥＠DVD/ DVR1 ã DVD/DVR2 ã DIGITAL æ ANALOG ï¼ ã 5 SURROUND ç¨æ¼é¸åÂÂç°ç¹Â模张ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 6 VOLUME æÂÂéµ ç¨æ¼調æ´é³éÂÂã 顯示幠1 DTS æÂÂæ¾ DTS ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 2 F.SURR. é¸åÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種åÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã SURR. é¸åÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Â種å Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²èÂÂè½模å¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 3 SOUND è²é³修æ£å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 4 調諧å¨æÂÂ示ç ï¼Â第 19 é Âï¼ ï¼ æÂ¥æ¶廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã ＠å¨èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂ¥æ¶ç«Âé«Âè² FM 廣æÂÂæÂÂæ 亮起ã ＠é¸å FM å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶æÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 5 kHz/MHz 表示åÂÂå Â顯示å¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂé »çÂÂå®你＠kHz ç¨æ¼ AM ï¼ MHz ç¨ æ¼ FM ï¼ ã 6 Ã¥ÂÂå Â顯示幠7 æ¤çÂÂå¨ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 8 2 PL II æ¤çÂÂå¨ Dolby Pro Logic II 解碼æÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 9 2 D æ¤çÂÂå¨æÂÂæ¾ Dolby Digital ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂæÂÂ亮起 ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 1 4 6 5 2 3 2 PL 2 D kHz MHz SOUND DTS F .SURR. 5 4 2 3 7 8 9 6 1 HTP-330.book Page 12 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 13 ChH ä¸Âæ éÂÂæ§å¨ 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³é»æºÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 MUTE æÂÂä¸Âå¯使æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæÂÂé³æÂÂéÂÂé³ ã åÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次便å¯åÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂé³並 æ¢復é³æÂÂã 3 VOLUME /â ç¨æ¼調æ´é³éÂÂã 4 輸堥é¸æÂÂæÂÂéµ DVD/DVR1 ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ DVD/DVR1 æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸 å ¥ã DVD/DVR2 ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ DVD/DVR2 æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸 å ¥ã DIGITAL ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ DIGITAL é³æÂÂ輸堥ã ANALOG ï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æ ANALOG é³æÂÂ輸堥ã ï¼Â第 23 é Âï¼ FM/AM â æÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂ堧建çÂÂç¡ç·Âé»調諧å¨ã ï¼Â第 19 é Âï¼ 5 æ¸åÂÂéµã CLEAR å ENTER 使ç¨æ¸åÂÂéµå¯ç´æ¥輸堥廣æÂÂéÂȌ°çÂÂã 使ç¨ CLEAR å¯渠é¤任ä½Â輸堥çÂÂ堧容並éÂÂæ°輸堥ã 使ç¨ ENTER 確èªÂ輸堥çÂÂ堧容ã 6 SLEEP æÂÂä¸Âå¯è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®Âæ ï¼Â第 26 é Âï¼ ã 7 SETUP ç¨æ¼åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®系統 ＠以便é²è¡Âç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âç½® ã 調諧å¨è¨Âå® çÂÂ＠第 15 ï¼ 19 ï¼ 20 ï¼ 21 ï¼ 26 é Âï¼ ã 8 SR ç¨æ¼è¨Âå® SR Ã¥ÂÂè½並é¸æ SR 模张ï¼Â第 25 é Âï¼ ã 9 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ( 游æ¨ÂæÂÂéµ ) å ENTER ç¨æ¼å°Â覽æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³é¸å®ã 10 SOUND ï¼Â第 18 é Âï¼ æÂÂä¸Âå¯é²堥é³æÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âé²èÂÂ調æ´ä½Âé³èÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂã 11 TEST TONE ç¨æ¼輸åº測試é³ ï¼Â以便é²è¡ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Â置＠ï¼Â第 22 é Âï¼ ã 12 SOUND RETRIEVER æÂÂä¸Âå¯尠CD Ã¥ÂÂ質é³æÂÂæ¢復æÂÂå£Â縮çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é³æÂÂä¾Â溠ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 13 SURROUND ç¨æ¼é¸åÂÂç°ç¹Â模张ï¼Â第 16 é Âï¼ ã 14 ADVANCED ç¨æ¼é¸åÂÂå ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âç°ç¹Â模张ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 15 F.S.SURR ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Â第 17 é Âï¼ ã 16 MCACC éÂÂå§Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ＠第 15 é Âï¼ ã 17 TV CONTROL ï¼Â第 27 é Âï¼ è¨Âå®Âå¾Âï¼Âå¯使ç¨éÂÂäºÂæ§å¶頠æ§å¶æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã TV CONTROL ST ANDBY/ON VOL UME MUTE TEST TONE SOUND SOUND RETRIEVER SURROUND CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT TV AD V ANCED F .S .SU RR MCACC SLEEP SETUP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST FM/AM D VD/D VR1 D VD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ENTER ENTER CLEAR RE CE IV ER RECEIVER 1 2 3 6 8 13 12 7 9 11 10 5 16 14 15 17 4 HTP-330.book Page 13 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ§å¶èÂÂ顯示 03 14 ChH 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ è¨Âä½Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂ頠＠⢠è«Â確å®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨èÂÂè£Âç½®ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨éÂÂç¡é»ç¤Âç©ã â¢ èÂ¥æÂÂå¼·å ÂæÂÂè¢å ÂçÂÂç §å°Âå¨è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ä¸Âï¼ åÂÂå¯ è½ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæ§æÂÂä½Âã â¢ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨å¯è½æÂÂäºÂç¸干æ¾ãÂÂè«Âé¿å Âå¨æ¤è£Âç½® éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨ã â¢ èÂ¥ç¼ç¾éÂÂæ§å¨ å¨ æÂÂä½Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå §ç¡æ³Âæ 你æ ï¼Âè« æ´æÂÂé» æ± ã â¢ è«Âå¦Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ示＠å¨顯示è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂä½Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æ¹使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ã è£Âå ¥éÂÂæ§å¨é»池1 æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨èÂÂé¢çÂÂé»池槽èÂÂã 2 è«Âä¾Âç §æÂÂ示 ï¼ î ＠î ＠ï¼Âå°Âå ©é¡ AA/R6 ä¹¾é»池æ¾堥 é»池槽ä¸Âã 3 éÂÂä¸Âé»池èÂÂã 注æ 使ç¨é¯誤çÂÂé»池å¯è½å¼Âèµ·å±éªï¼Âå¦Âæ¼ÂéÂȌÂÂçÂÂç¸ãÂÂè« éµå®Â以ä¸ÂäºÂ頠＠⢠è«Âå¿混åÂÂæ°èÂÂé»池使ç¨ã â¢ è«Âå¿混åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»池使ç¨ ï¼ éÂÂç¶å¤Âè§Âé¡Âä¼¼ï¼Âä½Âä¸Âå çÂÂé»池å¯è½å«ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»å£Âã â¢ è«Â確å®Âé»池çÂÂæ£負堩端èÂÂé»池槽ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ示ç¸符ã â¢ èÂ¥è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â使ç¨çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ趠éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºé»池ã â¢ èÂÂçÂÂ廢èÂÂé»池æÂÂï¼ è«Âéµå®Âæ¿åºÂæ¢Âä¾ÂæÂÂé©ç¨æ¼貴åÂÂæÂÂå° Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Â堬報æÂÂ令è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂã è¦å â¢ è«Âå¿å¨é½å Âç´尠æÂÂå ¶ä»ÂéÂÂç±çÂÂå°æ¹使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¾ é»池＠å¦Âè»Âå §æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂæ ãÂÂå¦åÂÂé»池å¯è½æ¼ÂéÂȋÂÂçÂÂç¸æÂÂèµ·ç« ã åÂÂæÂÂä¹ÂæÂÂ縮çÂÂé»池çÂÂ壽å½æÂÂæÂÂè½ã 30 30 7 m HTP-330.book Page 14 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂä½ 04 15 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 4 ç« éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂ你系統å±Â示è¨Âå®Âå¼ æ¤ è¨Âå®Âå¯åÂÂæ èªåÂÂå±Â示å è½ ï¼Âæ¤å è½ å¨第ä¸Â次æ ä¸Âé»溠æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ å¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æ DEMO ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸Âè¨Âå® å¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æ¨å¯é¸æÂÂ＠⢠DEMO ON ï¼ éÂÂå§Âå±Â示顯示å¹Âã â¢ DEMO OFF ï¼ éÂÂéÂÂå±Â示顯示å¹Âï¼Âä¸Â系統é²堥徠æ©Âç æ Âã 使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ç°ç¹Âé³æ å¤Âè²éÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£ ï¼ MCACC ＠系統å¯測éÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå § çÂÂé³場ç¹æ§＠å°Âé±éÂÂç°å¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂé³ç´Âå ¥èÂÂé ＠並測試è²éÂÂ延 é²èÂÂè²éÂÂé³é ã å®ÂæÂÂ系統éÂÂè´ÂçÂÂ麥å Â風è¨Âç½®å¾Â＠系統å°Âæ å©ç¨ä¸Âç³»åÂÂçÂÂ測試é³è³Â訠＠使ç¹å®Âæ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âå®Âå¼ èÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ ï¼Âé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼ÂéÂÂæÂÂä½³åÂÂã 1 éÂÂ覠⢠ç¨æ¼èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®çÂÂ測試é³é³éÂÂ極大 ï¼ ä½Âè«Âå¿å¨ è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂå°Âé³éÂÂè½Âå°Âï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂå°æÂÂä½³è¨Âç½®ç æ Âã â¢ è«Âå¿å¨ MCACC è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂ移åÂÂ麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ã 1 å°Â麥å Â風æÂ¥ä¸Âå¾Âé¢æ¿ç MCACC SETUP MIC æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 è«Âå°Â麥å Â風置æ¼æ£常çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®ã 使ç¨桠åÂÂæÂÂ椠åÂÂå°Â麥 å Â風水 å¹³ æ¾置å¨ ç´ÂèÂÂè³ æµçÂÂé« çÂÂæ£ 常èÂÂè½ä½Âç½®ã è«Â確å®Â麥å Â風èÂÂæÂÂè²å¨éÂÂç¡éÂÂç¤Âç©ã 3 èÂ¥æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çºéÂÂé ï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î STANDBY/ON å°Âå ¶é» æºÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 4 æÂÂ丠MCACC ã æÂÂ丠MCACC å¾Âï¼Âè«Âç¡å¯è½ä¿ÂæÂÂå®ÂéÂÂãÂÂé³éÂÂå°ÂæÂÂèªåÂÂ讠大ï¼Â系統æÂÂ輸åºä¸Âé£串çÂÂ測試é³ã â¢ èÂ¥è¦Âå¨å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ï¼ æÂÂ丠MCACC ã è£Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂç¹¼çºÂ使ç¨ä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã â¢ èÂ¥é±éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂ夠＠NOISY å°ÂæÂÂå¨顯示å¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂçºÂéÂÂ示 äºÂç§ÂãÂÂèÂ¥è¦ÂçµÂæÂÂ並檢æÂ¥éÂÂé³çÂÂç´ 2 ï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC æ åÂÂ試ä¸Â次ï¼Â顯示å¹Âä¸Â顯示 RETRY æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ è¥顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ ERR MIC æ ERR SP è¨Âæ¯ ï¼ åÂÂ表示麥堠風æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂé£æÂ¥å¯è½åºç¾åÂÂé¡ ã èÂ¥è¦ÂéÂÂ試 ï¼Âè«Âå¨顯 示 RETRY å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 MCACC è¨Âç½®å®ÂæÂÂå¾ ï¼Âé³éÂÂå°Âæ¢復çºæ£常é³éÂÂï¼Â顯示å¹Â丠æÂÂåºç¾ COMPLETE 4 並åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 5 éÂÂ註 1 æ¨åªéÂÂé²è¡Âä¸Â次èªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ï¼Âé¤éÂÂæ¨è®Âæ´æÂÂè²å¨æºè¨ÂæÂÂæ¿éÂÂä½Â置＠ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP 2 ⢠èÂ¥æ¿éÂÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Âé©åÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂèªå MCACC è¨Âç½® ï¼Âé±éÂÂéÂÂé³éÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂçÂÂå£Âè¿´é³ãÂÂå«é»ç¤ÂæÂÂè²å¨èÂÂ麥å Â風çÂÂç©é«Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼å¯è½æÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯ 誤ãÂÂè«Â檢æÂ¥å¯è½影é¿室堧ç°å¢ÂçÂÂ家éÂȍ¨å ï¼Âå·氣æ©ÂãÂÂå°箱ãÂÂéÂȾÂÂçÂÂï¼Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«ÂéÂÂéÂÂå ¶é»æºÂã â¢ é¨åÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå¯è½æÂÂèÂÂ麥å Â風äºÂç¸ç¢çÂÂå¹²æ¾ãÂÂèÂ¥ç¼çÂÂæ¤æ 形ï¼Âè«Âå¨èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 èÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠MCACC ãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂï¼Â並根æ ERR è¨Âæ¯檢æÂ¥åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂ試èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®ã 4 èÂ¥æª顯示 COMPLETE ï¼Âå¾Âå¯è½å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ãÂÂè«Â檢æÂ¥æÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ç·Â並åÂÂ試ä¸Â次ã 5 è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 18 é Âç 使ç¨ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Â以äºÂ解å¦Âä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé³場èªåÂÂè£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE D VD/D VR1 DVD/D VR2 DIGIT AL ANALOG ST ANDBY/ON TV INPUT CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOL U ME MCACC MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTRO L IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MC ACC SETUP MIC HTP-330.book Page 15 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ 05 16 ChH 第 5 章使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âæ¯èÂÂè½任ä½Â系統æ§å¶ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂæÂÂç°¡å®æ¹张ï¼Âæ è²å¨çÂÂ輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ åºä¾ÂæºÂè³ÂæÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂã èÂ¥æ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 4 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模 å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Âç 使ç¨åÂÂ段 ç°ç¹Âè²模张＠ã â¢ æÂÂ丠SURROUND 以便é¸æ AUTO èÂÂè½模å¼Âã èÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂçº Dolby Digital æ DTS ï¼ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ç 2 D æ DTS æÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç SURROUND æÂÂéµ ï¼Âè®Âæ´ èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 以ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂèÂÂè½ æ¨å¯以å¨ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂä¸Âï¼ èÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾Â溠ãÂÂç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂæ¯使ç¨ Dolby Pro Logic 解碼模å¼ÂçÂÂä¸Â種ç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂæ ç¢çÂÂçÂÂã èÂ¥æ¨å°Â系統è¨Âå®ÂçºåÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â第 4 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模 å¼Âå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂ輸åºçµÂæ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Âç 使ç¨åÂÂ段 ç°ç¹Âè²模张＠ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂ丠SURROUND 以便é¸æÂÂä»»ä¸ÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç SURROUND æÂÂéµ ï¼Âè®Âæ´ èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾çÂÂé¸頠è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã èÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂçº Dolby Digital æ DTS ï¼ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ç 2 D æ DTS æÂÂ示çÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã â¢ AUTO ï¼ èªåÂÂèÂÂè½模张ï¼Âå¦Âä¸Â述＠⢠DOLBY PL ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic ï¼ ï¼ 4.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æ ＠é©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾Â溠⢠MOVIE ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Movie ï¼ ï¼ 5.1 è²éÂÂç°繠é³æÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂæÂÂæ¾é»影ä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âé©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾Â溠⢠MUSIC ï¼ Dolby Pro Logic II Music ï¼ ï¼ 5.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âé³ æÂÂï¼Âç¹åÂ¥é©åÂÂæÂÂæ¾é³æ¨Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âé©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âè« åÂÂé±ä¸ÂæÂÂç Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ â¢ STEREO ï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 17 é Âç 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ Dolby Pro Logic II Music è¨Âå®Âå¼ 以 Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模张ï¼Âå¦Âä¸Âè¿°ï¼ÂèÂÂè½æÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯ 調æ´ä¸Â種è¨Âå®Âå¼ : ä¸Â置寬度ãÂÂ尺寸åÂÂå ¨æ¯ã 1 å¨åÂÂå Dolby Pro Logic II Music 模å¼ÂçÂÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼Âæ 丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) ï¼Âé¸æ ã C WIDTH ãÂÂã ã DIMEN. ãÂÂæ ã PANORAMA ã ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ C WIDTH ï¼Âä¸Â置寬度ï¼Âï¼ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂæ··é³æ æÂÂï¼Âå°Âå³åÂÂèÂÂå·¦åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂæ´æ£åºä¾Âï¼Âé³å è½起ä¾Âæ´廣 ï¼Âè¼Âé«Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼ÂæÂÂæ´窠ï¼Âè¼Âä½Âè¨Âå®Âå¼＠ã â¢ DIMEN. ï¼Â尺寸＠＠ç±åÂÂèÂÂå¾Â調æ´ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂ平衡çÂÂæ·± 度ï¼Â使è²é³ è½ èµ·ä¾Âæ´ é ï¼Âè² è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂæ´ è¿ ï¼Âæ£訠å®Âå¼＠ã â¢ PANORAMA ï¼Âå ¨æ¯＠＠å¯å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®ç«Âé«Âè²é³åÂÂ延伸＠使ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ç¢çÂÂæ´ ãÂÂå ¨é¢ãÂÂçÂÂé³æÂÂã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) 調æ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND TUNE TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book Page 16 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ 05 17 ChH ä¸Âæ 使ç¨åÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模张å¦Â第 4 é  æÂÂ述使ç¨åÂÂç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂï¼Âå¯以使ç¨ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã â¢ æÂÂ丠F.S.SURR 以é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ段ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Â以é¸æ FOCUS5.1 ã WIDE5.1 æ EXTRAPWR ã â¢ FOCUS5.1 ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂä¾Âå¼Âå°Âå°左å´èÂÂå³å´æÂÂè²å¨ç è²é³æÂÂå°ÂèÂÂéÂÂä¸Â央åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè±Âå¯Âç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã â¢ WIDE5.1 ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂä¾Â毠FOCUS5.1 模å¼Âé³åÂÂæ´寬廣 çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã â¢ EXTRAPWR ï¼ å¾Âç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨輸åºç«Âé«Âè² ï¼Âå¤Âè²éÂÂé³ æºÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ï¼Â以æÂÂä¾Â強大çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã 使ç¨ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé©ç¨æ¼任ä½Âå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ä¾Â溠ï¼Âæ ä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ種å¤Â樣çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂãÂÂéÂÂäºÂ模å¼Âæ¯以 第 6 é Âä¸ÂæÂÂè¿°ç æ¨ÂæºÂç°ç¹Âè¨Âç½®æÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³èÂÂè½æÂÂæÂÂèÂÂè¨Âè¨Âã â¢ æÂÂ丠ADVANCED 以é¸å ãÂÂå Âé²ç°ç¹Âè²ãÂÂ模å¼Âã åÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂ＠⢠ACTION â é©ç¨æ¼è§Âè³Âé»影 ⢠UNPLUGED ï¼ é©ç¨æ¼è²æ¨Âé³溠⢠EXPANDED ＠延伸è²場 ⢠TV SURR. ï¼ å®è²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»è¦Â廣æÂÂæÂÂä¾Âç°ç¹Âé³æ â¢ SPORTS ï¼ é©åÂÂç¨æ¼è§Âè³Âé«Âè²ç¯Âç® â¢ ADV.GAME ï¼ é©åÂÂç¨æ¼é»è¦ÂéÂÂæ²è¨Âå â¢ VIRTUAL ï¼ å 使ç¨éÂÂä½Âé³åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¢çÂÂèÂÂ捠ç°ç¹Âé³æ â¢ X-STEREO ï¼ ç«Âé«Âè²é³æ¨Âä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂå¼·åÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æ 以ç«Âé«Âè²èÂÂè½ æ¨å¯以使ç¨ç«Âé«Âè²è½åÂÂä»»ä½Âä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²é ãÂÂæ æ¾ å¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂæ ＠æÂÂæÂÂè²éÂÂç¶ÂéÂÂ縮混å¾Âå³éÂÂå°左åÂÂç½®î¿å³å 置æÂÂè²å¨åÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³ä¸Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂ丠SURROUND ï¼ ç´å°顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ STEREO ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç SURROUND æÂÂéÂ括Âè®Âæ´ èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 使ç¨ ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ èÂ¥å¨ MP3 æ WMA å£Â縮éÂÂç¨Âä¸Â移é¤é³æÂÂè³ÂæÂÂï¼Âè²é³åÂÂ質 éÂÂ常æÂÂåºç¾ä¸Âå¹³åÂÂçÂÂé³å ã ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æ¡ç¨æ°ç DSP æÂÂè¡ ï¼Âå¯èÂÂç±éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè²å£ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿®æ´å£Â縮å¾ÂçÂÂ人工缺é· ï¼ å° CD çÂÂé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æ¢復è³å£Â縮çÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂé³æÂÂã â¢ èÂÂè½ç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠SOUND RETRIEVER ã åÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¯å¨以ä¸Âå ©é  åÂÂè½éÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ＠⢠RTRV ON ï¼ éÂÂå ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ã ã â¢ RTRV OFF ï¼ éÂÂé ãÂÂè²é³修æ£å¨ã ã ST TUNE ST ENTER TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME F. S . SURR ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME ADV ANCED ST TUNE ST ENTER TV INPUT SOUND TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND VOLUME SURROUND ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SOUND RETRIEVER HTP-330.book Page 17 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
使ç¨系統æ¶è½é³æ 05 18 ChH 使ç¨ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ æ¨å¯以使ç¨å¨第 15 é Âç 使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âå®Â以éÂÂæÂÂä½³ ç°ç¹Âé³æ ä¸Âè¨Âå®Âç ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½è½åÂÂä¾ÂæºÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ MCACC EQ ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂçº EQ ON æ EQ OFF ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ å¨ EQ OFF è¨Âå®Âå¼ä¸Âï¼ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨çÂÂè¨Âå®ÂçºéÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂæÂÂè² å¨è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ è² éÂʌȦ é²èÂÂè² éÂÂä½Â溠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿ æ åÂÂä¾Âç 訠å®Âã â¢ ãÂÂé³場è£Âæ£çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¨使ç¨èªå MCACC è¨Âç½®å¾Âæ èªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å 強å°Âç½ å°Âç½強å (Dialogue Enhancement) Ã¥ÂÂè½æ¯çºçªÂ顯é»è¦ÂæÂÂé» å½±åÂÂè²帶èÂÂæ¯é³æÂÂçÂÂå°Âç½èÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂçÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ DIALOGUE ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂå°Âç½強åÂÂç¨Â度＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã å¯é¸æ OFF ( é ) ã MID ( 丠) æ MAX ( é« ) ã 使ç¨ ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂå ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模张ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯éÂÂä½Âé³æÂÂä¾ÂæºÂä¸ÂéÂÂéÂÂçÂÂä½Âé³æÂÂé«Âé³ã ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½åÂÂè½å¯è®Âæ¨以ä½Âé³éÂÂæ¶è½實éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ TONE ï¼ ç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ QUIET æ MIDNIGHT ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂ涠ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂã æ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âã èÂÂè½模张＠è«Âé¸å BASS/ TRE ã 調æ´ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ 使ç¨ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³æ§å¶調æ´æ´é«Âé³調ã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ TONE ï¼ ç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ BASS/TRE ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ é¸æ BASS/TRE æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ涠ãÂÂå¯ÂéÂÂãÂÂå ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤ÂãÂÂèÂÂè½模 å¼ÂãÂÂæ¨ç¡æ³ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂäºÂ模å¼Âã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸å BASS æ TREBLE ＠使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ調æ´é³æ ＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã å éÂÂä½Âé³é³é æ¬系統æÂÂä¾Â堩種ä½Âé³模张＠æ¨å¯以ç¨æ¼è£Âå¼·ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂä½Âé³é³ éÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SOUND ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ BASSMODE ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ＠é¸æÂÂé³æ ＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER 確èªÂã å¯é¸æ OFF ( é ) ã MUSIC ( é³樠) æ CINEMA ( Ã¥ÂÂé¢ ) ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SOUND HTP-330.book Page 18 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¶è½廣æ 06 19 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 6 ç« æ¶è½廣æ æ¶è½廣æ 調諧å¨å¯æÂ¥æ¶ FM è AM 廣æ ＠並è®Âæ¨è½å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¶è½çÂÂé» å°è¨Âæ¶ä¸Âä¾Âï¼Âå¦Âæ¤便ä¸ÂéÂÂå¨æ¯Â次æ¶è½æÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調é¸ã 1 æÂÂ丠FM/AM å¯åÂÂæÂÂè³調諧å¨ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂ便å¯é¸å FM æ AM 波段ã 顯示å¹ÂæÂÂ顯示波段åÂÂé »çÂÂã 2 調é¸éÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂé »çÂÂã 報æÂÂä¸Â種調諧模å¼Âå¯ä¾Âé¸æ ＠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«ÂéÂÂ＠⢠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧 ï¼ éÂÂè¤Âæ TUNE /â 以åÂÂæÂÂ顯示頻çÂÂã â¢ èªåÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示å¹ÂéÂÂå§Â移å å¾Âæ¾éÂÂãÂÂ調諧å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂç´¢å°çÂÂéÂȌ°ãÂÂæÂÂçºÂæ¤ Ã¥ÂÂä½Â便å¯繼çºÂæÂÂç´¢ã â¢ é«ÂéÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ＠ç´å°頻çÂÂ顯示å¹ÂéÂÂå§Âå¿« éÂÂ移åÂÂã 繼 çºÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéµ ï¼ ç´å°æ¾ å° è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂé »çÂÂçº æ¢ãÂÂå¿ è¦ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧微調頻çÂÂã æ¹å FM æÂ¥æ¶ä¸Âè¯ èÂ¥æ¨æ£以ç«Âé«Âè²æ¶è½ FM éÂȌ° ï¼Âä½Âæ¶è¨Âä¸Âä½³ï¼Âå¯åÂÂæÂÂè³å® è²éÂÂ以便æ¹åÂÂé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質ã 1 調é¸è³ FM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ FM MODE ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ FM MONO ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 調諧å¨èÂÂæ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âå®è²éÂÂæÂÂ示ç ＠＠æ 亮起ã é¸åÂÂä¸Âè¿°ç FM AUTO ï¼Â便å¯åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模张ï¼ÂæÂ¥æ¶ç«Âé«Âè²廣æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂ示ç ＠ï¼ÂæÂÂ亮起＠ã æ¹å AM é³æÂÂä¸Âä½³ æ¹å AM æ¶é³æ©Âé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質æÂÂç°¡å®çÂÂæ¹å¼Âå°±æ¯確å®Âæ¿éÂÂå § çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯å¦éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂæ¨ä¹Âå¯以試èÂÂæ¹讠AM 迴路天ç·Âç ä½Âç½®èÂÂæ¹åÂÂã æ¹è®ÂéÂÂé³æÂÂå¶模张é²è¡Âä¸Âè¿°åÂÂä½Âå¾Âï¼ÂèÂ¥ä»Âç¡æ³Âæ¹åÂÂé³æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質ï¼Âæ¨å¯使ç¨丠åÂÂçÂÂéÂÂé³æÂÂå¶模å¼Âç²å¾Âæ¹åÂÂãÂÂåªè¦Âé¸æÂÂè½起ä¾ÂæÂÂ好çÂÂé³ æÂÂå³å¯ã 1 調é¸è³ AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ NOISECUT ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂéÂÂé³æÂÂå¶模张＠1 ã 2 æ 3 ï¼ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã è¨Âæ¶éÂȌ° æ¨å¯以å²åÂÂé«Âé 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤便å¯è¼Âé¬Âæ¶è½åÂÂæ çÂÂéÂȌ°ï¼Âä¸Âå¿ æ¯Â次é²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調é¸ã 1 調諧è³ FM æ AM 廣æÂÂéÂȌ°ã è¦ÂéÂÂè¦Âé¸æÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂÂèªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¥æ¶ (FM) æÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂæÂÂå¶模 å¼ (AM) ãÂÂéÂÂäºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂé Âè¨Âè¨Âå®Âä¸Âä½µå²åÂÂã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ ST.MEM. ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂé Â訠éÂȌ°ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȌ° 1 è«Â確å®Âå·²é¸åÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ã 2 使ç¨ ST /â æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã â¢ æÂÂè 使ç¨æ¸åÂÂéµç´æÂ¥é¸åÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȌ°ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TON E SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR D VD/DVR1 DVD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP FM/AM HTP-330.book Page 19 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
æ¶è½廣æ 06 20 ChH æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé èÂ¥ç¼ç¾ç¡æ³Â調諧éÂȌ° ï¼ åÂÂæ¬系統çÂÂé »çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå¯è½ä¸Âé©ç¨æ¼ æ¨æÂÂå¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家î¿å°åÂÂã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ ã AM 9K/10K ã ＠ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼＠ç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER 確èªÂã â¢ AM 9K ï¼ AM çº 9 kHz éÂÂéÂÂï¼ FM çº 50 kHz éÂÂé â¢ AM 10K ï¼ AM çº 10 kHz éÂÂé ＠FM çº 100 kHz éÂÂé HTP-330.book Page 20 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 21 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 7 ç« ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 使ç¨ ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å® æ¨å¯以徠ã è¨Âå® ã é¸å®åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 1 ï¼ å æ²éÂÂä½Â溠ã æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æ´以åÂÂéÂÂå®è²é é³æÂÂæÂÂæ¾ã æ¨å¯以使ç¨以ä¸ÂæÂÂéµæÂÂä½ ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å®ã è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Â第 15 é Âï¼ æÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æ è¨Âå® ã ç¶èÂÂæ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ ï¼Âé²ä¸Âæ¥調æ´è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂå¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¿ éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã é 種è¨Âå® è²éÂÂ你溠çÂÂæ¹张å¯è®Âæ¨ æ¶è½侠æºÂ並調 æ´ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ¾è²éÂÂçÂÂä½Â溠ã è«Â注æÂÂï¼ ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂæ¾çÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼è ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ç¡éÂÂã æ´é²éÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âæ¹å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯使ç¨測試é³ ã 詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 22 é Âç 使ç¨測試é³調æ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠ã 1 é¸æÂÂ以ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾ä¾ÂæºÂã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ CH LEVEL ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) é¸æÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) 調æ´è²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂã â¢ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã â¢ è¥系統èÂÂæ¼ ãÂÂç«Âé«Âè²ãÂÂæ ãÂÂèÂÂæ‹ÂÂ模å¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂèÂʊȴ ãÂÂèªåÂÂãÂÂ模 å¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ç«Âé«Âè²侠æºÂï¼Âå°Âç¡æ³Â調æ´ä¸Âç½®æÂÂç° ç¹Âè²éÂÂã 5 å®ÂæÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âå°ÂæÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âå¼ã æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âå®Âå¼ èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 15 é Âï¼ æÂÂè½æÂÂä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂç° ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå® ã ç¶èÂÂæ¨å¯è½æÂÂç¼ç¾ ï¼Âé²ä¸Âæ¥調æ´æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ è¨Âå®Âå¼å¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂã å¾Âæ£常çÂÂèÂÂè½ä½Âç½®è¨Âå®Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ DISTANCE ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) é¸æÂÂæÂÂè²å¨＠îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) 調æ´è·Âé¢ã 調æ´ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨＠⢠L ï¼ å·¦åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠C ï¼ ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠R ï¼ å³åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SR ï¼ å³ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SL ï¼ å·¦ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SW ï¼ éÂÂä½Âé³ æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢調æ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº 0.3 m è³ 9.0 m ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂå¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âå¼ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ 以ä½Âé³éÂÂè§Âè³ Dolby Digital æ DTS è³ÂæÂÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯è½ç¡泠渠æ¥Âè½å°ä½Âä½ÂæºÂé³æ â å æŽ¨åÂÂå°Âç½ãÂÂ使ç¨堶ä¸Âä¸Âé  å æ Âç¯Âå æ§å¶ ï¼ DRC ï¼Âè¨Âå®Âå¼便 å¯ æÂÂé«Âä½ ä½ÂæºÂé³ æÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ§å¶é«Âä½ÂæºÂé«Âé³ã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶å é©ç¨æ¼ Dolby Digital Ã¥ÂÂè²帶åÂÂé¨å DTS å è²帶ã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ DRC ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ 丠ENTER ã éÂÂ註 1 æ¨éÂÂå¯徠ãÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂé¸å®ä¸Â調æ´堶ä»Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ï¼Â詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 19 é Âç æ¶è½廣æ åÂÂ第 26 é Âç 堶ä»Âè³Â訠ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book Page 21 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 07 22 ChH 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) é¸æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã è«Âé¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âé  è¨Âå®Âå¼＠⢠DRC OFF ï¼Âé Âè¨Âï¼ ï¼ ç¡åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調æ´ ï¼Â以é«Âé³éÂÂè è½æÂÂè«Âé¸æÂÂæ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼＠⢠DRC MID ï¼ é©ä¸Âè¨Âå®Âå¼ â¢ DRC HIGH ï¼ æ¸Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯Âå ï¼ÂéÂÂä½Â大è²é³éÂÂ並æÂÂé« è¼Âå°Âè²çÂÂé³æÂÂï¼ 4 æÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæÂÂã éÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ æÂÂå®ÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂç Dolby Digital 編碼æ¹å¼Âæ DTS Ã¥ÂÂè²帶ç æÂÂæ¾æ¹张ã æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨æ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂèªÂé³æÂÂé 製ç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂé³æÂÂè²éÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ DUALMONO ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) é¸æÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ã è«Âé¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âé  è¨Âå®Âå¼＠⢠CH1 MONO ï¼Âé Âè¨Âï¼ ï¼ å æÂÂæ¾è²é 1 ⢠CH2 MONO ï¼ å æÂÂæ¾è²é 2 ⢠CH1/CH2 ï¼ å ©åÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç±åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæ¾ 4 æÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæÂÂã 使ç¨測試é³調æ´è²éÂÂä½Â溠æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨測試é³ä½ÂçºåÂÂèÂÂè¨Âå®Âè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼ÂèÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ æ¾ä¾Â溠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 21 é Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ï¼ ãÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ è²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæ¾測試é³ï¼Â以ä¾Âæ¨å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂ調æ´ä½ÂæºÂã è«Â注æÂÂï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²ä¾ÂæºÂçÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼èÂÂç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂä¾Â溠çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ç¡éÂÂã 1 æÂÂ丠SURROUND 以便é¸æÂÂèªåÂÂèÂÂè½模å¼Âã â¢ èÂ¥æ³è¦Âè¨Âå®Âç«Âé«Âè²ï¼ÂéÂÂè²éÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂè²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂï¼Âè«Âé¸ æ STEREO èÂÂè½模å¼Âã 2 æÂÂ丠TEST TONE ã æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ輪æµÂæÂÂæ¾測試é³ã 3 æÂÂæ¾測試é³æÂÂï¼Âå¯使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ調æ´ 該è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂã æ¤ç®çÂÂå¨æ¼調æ´ä½ÂæºÂï¼Â確ä¿Âæ¨å¾Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è½å°çÂÂ測試 é³é³éÂÂçÂÂç¸åÂÂãÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂä½ÂæºÂ調æ´ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dB ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨ VOLUME /â æÂÂéµ ＠調æ´測試é³輸åºç æ´é«Âé³é ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼＠ã â¢ èÂÂ¥ 系統è æ¼ ãÂÂç« é«Âè²ãÂÂæ ãÂÂèÂÂæ‹ÂÂ模 å¼Âï¼Âå° ç¡ æ³Â調 æ´ä¸Âç½®æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²éÂÂã â¢ ç±æ¼ éÂÂä½Âé³ æ ç¢ ç 趠你頻çÂÂï¼Â堶實 é é³ æ å¯ è½ æ´大 è²ãÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°èÂÂè½ä¾ÂæºÂæ ï¼Â調æ´éÂÂä½Âé³ä½ÂæºÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 21 é Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂå¾Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæÂÂ測試é³è¨Âå®Âã â¢ èÂ¥åÂÂ次使ç¨èªå MCACC Ã¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¤èÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âå®Âå¼ã ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOLUME SR ST TUNE TUNE ENTER TEST TONE SURROUND HTP-330.book Page 22 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âæ¥締08 23 ChH ä¸Âæ 第 8 ç« å ¶ä»Âæ¥締éÂÂ覠⢠尠æ¤系統é²è¡Âæ¥締æÂÂè®Âæ´æÂ¥ç·ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ éÂÂéÂÂé» æºÂ＠並å°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂèªçÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂé¤ãÂÂå®ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ¥ ç·Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°Âé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂé ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âé»æºÂæÂÂ座ã é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³堷åÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ä½Â輸堥ï¼Â以ä¾Âæ¸ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾è£Â置使ç¨ ＠妠DVD ã CD å MD æÂÂæ¾å¨çÂÂã â¢ å° DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨çÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂæ¸ä½Â輸åºæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½ é³çÂÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸Âå DIGITAL 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 使ç¨å¸Âé¢ä¸Â販å®çÂÂå Âå¸çºÂç·ÂæÂÂé¨éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸é»ç·Âé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ã é£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½® å¯以使ç¨ ANALOG 輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥é¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½®ï¼Âå¦Âæ¶é é³æ©ÂçÂÂãÂÂ詳細æÂ¥ç·Âè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 11 é Âç 使ç¨æ¤系統你çºé»è¦Âé³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼Âæ¤èÂÂ說æÂÂé£æÂ¥é»è¦ÂçÂÂé³æÂÂ輸åº＠ä½Âä¹Âé© ç¨æ¼任ä½Âé¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂè£Âç½®çÂÂé£æ¥＠ã èÂÂè½å¤ÂæÂ¥é³æÂÂä¾Â溠æ¨习å¯以尠顠毠åÂÂæ¸你ç 夠æÂ¥é³æ 侠溠é£æÂ¥è³ æ¬ ç³» çµ±ã æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂä¾ÂæºÂå æ¾¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æ¶å¨ã CD éÂÂé³å¨çÂÂãÂÂé¡Â毠ä¾ÂæºÂÃ¥ÂÂå æ¾¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ© ãÂÂå¦è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ä¸ÂæÂÂç é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® ã 1 è¥系統å°ÂæªéÂÂæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î STANDBY/ON 便å¯éÂÂæ©Âã åÂÂæÂÂè«Â確宠å¤Âæ¥侠溠ï¼Âé»覠æ©ÂãÂÂè¡ æÂÂæÂ¥æ¶ å¨çÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂé»溠已éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 é¸å DVD/DVR1 ã DVD/DVR2 ã DIGITAL æ ANALOG ＠以便é¸æÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂã éÂÂäºÂæÂÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 3 å¿ è¦ÂæÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¾ÂæºÂã é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締èÂ¥çº AM å¤Âæ¥天締＠è«Â使ç¨ 5 è³ 6 m çÂÂä¹Âç¯åºçµÂç·£é»締＠並å®Âè£Âæ¼室堧æÂÂ室å¤ÂãÂÂè«Âä¿ÂæÂÂ迴路天ç·ÂçÂÂæÂ¥ç·Âã èÂ¥çº FM å¤Âæ¥天締＠è«Â使ç¨ PAL æÂ¥é Âé£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥ç FM 天締ã SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CONTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 MC ACC SETUP MIC æÂÂæ¾å¨ç è³æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸＠è³æ¸ä½Âé³æÂÂ輸åº ï¼Âå ÂçºÂï¼ æ DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) V OLUME ST ANDBY/ON MUTE FM/AM ST ANDBY/ON D VD/DVR1 DVD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL MCACC SETUP MIC SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CO NTROL IN CONTROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ANALOG RL RL R L AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 室å¤Â天締FM å¤Âæ¥天締AM å¤Âæ¥天締迴路天締P AL æ¥頠(5 m è³ 6 m) 室堧天締ï¼Âä¹Âç¯åºå¡ÂæÂÂéÂÂ屬ç·Âï¼ HTP-330.book Page 23 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âæ¥締08 24 ChH å°Âæ¤è£Âç½®é£æÂ¥å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ èÂ¥æÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ 1 ï¼Âå¯使ç¨ SR é£æ¥締2 é£æÂ¥æ¬è£Âç½® ï¼ å©ç¨åÂÂ種便å©åÂÂè½æÂÂæ§æ¬è£Âç½® ï¼ å¦Âé»漿顯示å¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæ å¨ã èªåÂÂè¦Âè¨Â輸堥åÂÂæ ã é»漿顯示å¨ç«é¢åºç¾çÂÂ顯示è£Âç½® è¨Âæ¯以åÂÂèªåÂÂé³éÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½çÂÂã éÂÂ覠⢠æ¥丠SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âå¾ ï¼ÂèÂ¥è¦Âæ§å¶æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³＠æ¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§ å¨忠é Âå°ÂæºÂé»漿顯示å¨＠èÂÂä¸Âæ¯æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ顯示裠置ã â¢ è«Â使ç¨ä¸Âç°çÂÂè¿·ä½ æÂÂé  SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°Âæ¬è£Âç½®ç CONTROL IN æÂ¥ä¸Âé»漿顯示å¨ç CONTROL OUT ã 3 æ¨忠é Âå Âå°Âæ¬è£Âç½®é²è¡Âä¸ÂäºÂè¨Âå® ï¼ æÂÂå¯使ç¨堶ä»Âä¸ÂæÂÂç 堠éÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç SR è¨Âå® ã å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç SR è¨Âå® å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨已使ç¨ SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âå°Âæ¬è£Âç½®é£æÂ¥å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示 å¨ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Âé²è¡Â以ä¸Âè¨Âå®Âã 1 æÂÂ丠SR ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ SETUP ï¼Âç¶徠æÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æÂÂè¦Â調æ´çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ã å¨顯示å¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂ覽æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸頠æ ＠æÂÂ顯示ç®åÂÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ ãÂÂè«Âå é±以ä¸Âè¦Âé»Âï¼ÂäºÂ解å®Âæ´çÂÂ渠å®以åÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸頠çÂÂ說æÂÂã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Â調æ´è¨Âå®Âå¼ã 5 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠3 è· 4 ï¼Âé²è¡Âå ¶ä»Âè¨Âå®Âã 6 å®ÂæÂÂå¾Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER çµÂæ SR è¨Âå®Âé¸å®ã é»漿顯示å¨èªåÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½ éÂÂå ãÂÂé³é æ§å¶ãÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂèÂ¥é åÂÂæÂ¥æ¶ éÂÂä½Âé³ï¼ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂÂ¥ æ¶é ä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½è®Âæ´çºå¾ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³æ¶è½é³æ ＠èÂÂä¸Â使ç¨ é»漿顯示å¨æ¶è½æ ï¼Â妠DVD ï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé» 漿顯示å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂå° æÂÂèªåÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ VOL.C ON ï¼ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¬è£Âç½®é»æºÂæÂÂè®Âæ´輸堥åÂÂè½徠＠é» 漿顯示å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂæÂÂè½ÂçºéÂÂé³ ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤便å æÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ¬è£Âç½® çÂÂé³æÂÂã â¢ VOL.C OFF ï¼ æ¬è£Âç½®ç¡æ³Âæ§å¶é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂé³éÂÂã éÂÂ註 1 æ¬系統èÂÂæÂÂæ 2003 å¹´å¾ÂçÂÂç¢çÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ç¸容ã 2 å¯åÂÂå ÂéÂÂ購買ä¸Âç°ç SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âï¼Âé¶件æ¨ÂèÂÂçº ADE7095 ãÂÂå¦ÂéÂÂ購買 SR é£æÂ¥ç·ÂçÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âæ´½å ÂéÂÂ客æ¶æ¯æ´é¨éÂÂã 3 èÂ¥æ¬è£Âç½®ç CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥é»漿顯示å¨ç CONTROL OUT ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨æ¬è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ã å³使èÂÂæ¼徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼Âåªè¦Âé»æºÂå°ÂæªéÂÂéÂÂï¼ æ¨ä»Âå¯使 ç¨é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨ã SYSTEM CONNECTOR AC IN CON TROL IN CON TROL USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT . SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. OUT SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT SURROUND DVD/DVR1 (COAXIAL) DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) DIGITAL (OPTICAL) SPEAKERS DIGITAL A UDIO INPUT ANALOG AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 RL RL R L MCACC SETUP MIC å ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ CONTROL IN CONTROL OUT ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC ADV ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SR HTP-330.book Page 24 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âæ¥締08 25 ChH ä¸Âæ é»漿顯示å¨èªåÂÂ輸堥åÂÂæ 使é»漿顯示å¨è½å¨æ¨è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½æ ï¼Âèª Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³æ£確çÂÂ輸堥溠＠æ¨éÂÂè¦Âè®Â顯示å¨æÂÂæÂÂå°系統已é£ æÂ¥ã ä¾Â妠＠è¥尠DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç DV1 輸堥æºÂå é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂ輸堥 2 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨æ¤è«Âé¸å DV1 PDP2 訠å®Âå¼ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤ç¶æ¨å°ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½åÂÂæÂÂçº DV1 觠賠DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨堧容æ ＠é»漿顯示å¨å°ÂæÂÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³輸堥 2 ã æ¨å¯å¨æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³輸堥åÂÂè½ ï¼ DV1 ï¼ DVD/DVR1 ï¼ ã DV2 ï¼ DVD/DVR2 ï¼ ã DIG ï¼ DIGITAL ï¼ ã ANA ï¼ ANALOG ï¼ ï¼ ä¸Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠NONE ï¼ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé»漿顯示å¨輸堥 ⢠PDP1 è³ PDP7 ï¼ å°Âé»漿顯示å¨輸堥åÂÂæÂÂçº堶ä¸Âä¸Âå 編 èÂÂçÂÂ輸堥侠æºÂã ï¼Âè«Â注 æÂÂï¼Â顯 示çÂÂç·¨èÂÂè¦ÂèÂÂæ¬è£Âç½® é£æÂ¥çÂÂé»漿顯示å¨èÂÂå®ÂãÂÂ＠⢠TVTN ï¼ å°Âé»漿顯示å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³堶堧建é»è¦Â調諧å¨ Ã¥ÂÂ註 ⢠è«Â注æ ＠PDP 輸堥 ï¼Âä¾Â妠PDP7 ï¼ å¨æ¨çÂÂé»漿顯示å¨丠å¯è½稱çº ã PC 輸堥ã ã â¢ å¨徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âä¸Âï¼ SR è¨Âå®Âå¼ä»ÂçºæÂÂæÂÂã â¢ SR è¨Âå®Âå¼並ä¸ÂæÂÂå½±é¿ FM/AM 調諧å¨åÂÂè½ã 尠SR 模å¼ÂèÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨æÂÂé Â使ç¨ 1 æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç SR ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âé¸æ SR ON ï¼Âç¶ å¾ æÂÂ丠ENTER ã â¢ å³使å°ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢復＠SR è¨Âå®Âå¼ ä»Âä¿ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®ÂãÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé»æºÂå¾Âï¼Â便æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèª Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂ輸堥åÂÂæÂÂã â¢ èÂ¥æÂÂ丠SR é£æ¥締ï¼Âæ å¨ SR éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Âé»漿顯示å¨é»溠éÂÂéÂÂï¼ SR ON è¨Âå®Âå¼ä»Âä¿ÂæÂÂä¸Âè®Âã â¢ èÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ SR OFF ï¼Âè«Âæ ¹æÂÂæ¥驠1 è· 2 çÂÂæÂÂ示 ï¼Âç¶ å¾Âé¸æ SR OFF ã åÂÂ註 ⢠å³使é»漿顯示å¨çÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨å¨徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âä¸Âï¼Âæ¨ä»Âå¯ æ§å¶æ¬è£Âç½®ï¼Âä½ÂèÂ¥éÂÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨é»溠＠AC off ï¼Â並 å° SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥è³æ¬è£Âç½®ç CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ ï¼ åÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨ æ¬ è£Âç½®çÂÂéÂÂæ§ æ æÂÂå¨æÂÂé»漿顯 示 å¨çÂÂé æ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨æ§å¶æ¬è£Âç½®ã éÂÂæ¼æ§å¶輸åºé£æÂÂ¥ æÂÂå¤Â種å ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯æ´ SR CONTROL é£æÂ¥ï¼Âå°ÂéÂÂäºÂé£æ¥訠åÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂæºÂå ¶ä¸Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¨å³å¯使ç¨ã 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨æ ï¼Âæ§å¶è¨ÂèÂÂæÂÂ沿èÂÂé»路å³éÂÂè³é©ç¶çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨é¸æÂÂ使ç¨æ¤åÂÂè½ ï¼ è«Â確å®Âè³å°Âå°Âä¸ÂçµÂé¡Âæ¯ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸æ¸ ä½Âé³æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³堶ä»Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âï¼Âä½ÂçºæÂ¥å°ç¨éÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨任丠å´é½æ å®è²éÂÂè¿· ä½ æÂÂé Âç é£æ¥締＠é å¦ 購＠ï¼Âå°Âå¦ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âç CONTROL IN é£æÂ¥å°æÂ¥æ¶ éÂÂä½Âé³ä¸Âç CONTROL OUT ã å¦Âæ¤æ¨ 便å¯尠堶éÂÂæ§ å¨å°Â溠æ¤ æÂ¥æ¶é ä½Âé³é¨ éÂÂçÂÂ顯 示裠置ï¼Âé²èÂÂæ§å¶堶ä»Âè¨Âå ï¼Âå¦Âæ«Âä¸Âç DVD éÂÂå½±æ©Âï¼ ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以ä¸Âè¿°æ¹张ï¼Âå°Âæ¤æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³é£æÂ¥è³é»漿顯示 å¨ï¼Âå¦Âæ¤ä¸Âä¾Âï¼Âæ¨就éÂÂå°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»漿顯示å¨ï¼Â以 便æ§å¶ DVD æÂÂæ¾å¨ãÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³以åÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ã HTP-330.book Page 25 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 26 ChH 第 9 ç« å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ç¶ÂéÂÂç¹å®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¾Âå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ·æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³çÂÂé»溠＠æ¨å¯æ¾å¿Âå ¥ç¡ã 1 1 æÂÂ丠SLEEP æÂÂéµé¸æÂÂä»»ä¸Âé¸頠ã æÂÂ以ä¸Âé¸頠å¯ä¾Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠SLP ON ï¼ ç´Âä¸Âå°ÂæÂÂå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»溠⢠SLP OFF ï¼ åÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ é¸æ SLP ON å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Â次 SLEEP å¯檢 æÂ¥å©é¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂãÂÂæ¯Âæ¢Âç·Â代表素12 Ã¥ÂÂé ï¼Âå©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂ＠＠調æÂÂ顯示å¹Â亮度 èÂ¥æ¨覺å¾Â太亮ï¼Âå¯調æÂÂ顯示å¹ÂçÂÂ亮度ã 2 1 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 2 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âé¸æ DIMMER ï¼Âç¶ å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼ é¸æ LIGHT æ DARK ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã DTS CD è¨Âå®Âå¼ èÂ¥æ¨è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾ DTS 編碼ç CD å Âç¢Âç ＠æ¨éÂÂè¦Âè®Âæ´æ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼ æÂÂå¯è½å°解碼çÂÂè¨ÂèÂÂã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂçº徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂ丠SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( å·¦î¿å³游樠) æÂÂéÂ括Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æ CD TYPE ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ( ä¸Âî¿ä¸Â游樠) æÂÂéµ ï¼Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸Âè¨Âå® å¼ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂ丠ENTER ã æ¨å¯é¸æÂÂ＠⢠NORMAL ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂæ¾ä¸Â莳æ CD ãÂÂé¨å DTS 編碼 ç CD æÂÂæ¼æÂÂæ¾æÂÂç¢çÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ DTS-CD ï¼ ç¨æ¼æÂÂæ¾ DTS 編碼ç CD ï¼Âè«Â注æÂÂï¼Âå¯è½ æÂÂçÂ¥éÂÂä¸Âè¬ CD Ã¥ÂÂé¢é¨åÂÂçÂÂæ²ç®ã éÂÂè¨Â系統 使ç¨æ¤ç¨ÂåºÂå¯å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統è¨Âå®Âå¼æ¢復è³åº廠è¨Âå®Âã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統é»æºÂã 2 æÂÂä½ SURROUND ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂæÂÂä¸Â顯示è£Âç½®ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON æÂÂéµã ä¸Â次éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»æºÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂ系統çÂÂè¨Âå®Âå¼é½æÂÂéÂÂæ°è¨Âå®Âã éÂÂ註 1 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂï¼Â顯示å¹ÂæÂÂè®ÂæÂÂã 2 è¨Âå®Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂï¼Âä¸Âè«Âæ¤è¨Âå®Âå¼çºä½Âï¼Â顯示å¹Âé½æÂÂè®ÂæÂÂã ST TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SLEEP SR SLEEP SL P --- -- ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR SOUND SETUP TEST TONE SOUND RETRIEVER SLEEP SR ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER SETUP HTP-330.book Page 26 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 27 ChH ä¸Âæ å®Âè£ÂèÂÂç¶Âè· å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¸ÂæÂÂæ¨è½夠å¨æÂ¥å¾Â享åÂÂæ¬系統æÂÂ帶ä¾ÂçÂÂæ¨Â趣 ï¼ å æ¤é¸ æÂÂå®Âè£Âå°é»ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âè¨Âä½Â以ä¸Âè¦Âé»Âï¼ è« î å¨éÂÂ風è¯好çÂÂæ¿éÂÂ堧使ç¨æ¬系統ã î å°Âæ¬系統æ¾å¨穩åºãÂÂå¹³å¦çÂÂæ°´å¹³é¢ï¼Âå¦Âæ¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç½®ç©æ«ÂæÂÂé³é¿ æ¶丠ã è«Âå¿ î æ¼é«Â溫æÂÂæ¿Âæ°£éÂÂçÂÂå°æ¹使ç¨æ¬系統ï¼Âå æ¾¾å°Âç©åÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂç¢ çÂÂç±æºÂçÂÂéÂȌ¨ç¢åÂÂã î å°Âæ¬系統æ¾å¨çªÂå°æÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½åÂÂé½å Âç´å°Âä¹ÂèÂÂã î å¨ç°塵éÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¼潮æ¿ÂçÂÂç°å¢Âä¸Â使ç¨æ¬系統ã î å°Âæ¬系統ç´æÂ¥æ¾å¨æ´大å¨ä¸Âæ¹ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾å¨堶ä»Â使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂè®Âç±ç ç«Âé«Âè²系統è£Âç½®ä¸Âã î å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂç£è¦Âå¨éÂÂè¿Â使ç¨æ¬系統ï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¢çÂÂå¹²æ¾ ï¼Â尤堶æ¯使ç¨室堧天ç·ÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã î å¨å»Âæ¿æ 堶 ä»Âå¯è½ 使 系統æ´ é²æ¼油 ç  æÂÂè¸氣 ç å° æ¹使ç¨ æ¬ 系統ã î å°Âæ¬系統 æ¾ å¨åÂÂé ç å°毯丠æÂÂç¨帠è ä½Âï¼Â以 å  é» ç¤Â系統 ç æ£ç±ã î å°Â系統æ¾å¨ä¸Â平穩çÂÂ表é¢ï¼ÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Âé¢ç©Âç¡æ³Âæ¯æÂÂ系統åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè ³ æ¶çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âã è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© æ¨å¯以使ç¨é¨éÂÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæ§é»è¦Âæ© ãÂÂèÂ¥è¦Â使ç¨æ¤åÂÂè½＠æ¨忠é Âå Â使ç¨ä¸Âé Â表ä¸ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨Â碼è¨Âå®ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé»æºÂã 2 æÂÂä½ CLEAR æÂÂéÂ括Â輸堥é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨Â碼ã â¢ è¥表ä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂæ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ¨Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱 ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æ³Â使ç¨æ¤éÂÂæ§ å¨æÂÂæ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 å°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ丠î TV ï¼Â確èªÂéÂÂæ§å¨æ¯å¦ å¯ç¨ã èÂ¥éÂÂæ§å¨çÂÂè¨Âå®Âæ£確 ï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥æªéÂÂæ© ï¼Âä¸Âåº ç¾堶ä»Âæ¨Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æ°代碼並éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠2 ã 使ç¨é»è¦ÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂéµ ä¸Â表說æÂÂå¦Âä½Â使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæ§é»è¦Âæ©Âã æÂÂéµ Ã¥ÂÂç¨ î TV æÂÂä¸Âå¯éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂé ï¼Âå¾ æ©Âï¼Âé»è¦Âæ©Âé»溠INPUT æÂÂä¸Âå¯è®Âæ´é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂè¦Âè¨Â輸堥 TV VOLUME ç¨æ¼調æ´é»è¦Âæ©Âé³é TV CHANNEL ç¨æ¼è½ÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé »é ST TUNE TUNE ST ENTER ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT SOUND V OLUME SETUP TEST TON E CHANNEL SOUND RETRIEVER MCACC AD V ANCED F .S.SURR SURROUND SLEEP VOL UME SR FM/AM D VD/DVR1 D VD/D VR2 ANALOG DIGIT AL CLEAR TV CONTROL TV INPUT CHANNEL VOL UME HTP-330.book Page 27 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 28 ChH é Âè¨Â代碼表 è«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå®Âæ£確é Âè¨Â代碼å¾Âï¼Âå¯è½åªæÂÂç¹å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å¯ä¾Âæ§å¶ï¼ÂæÂÂè 表ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼ç¡æ³Âç¨æ¼æ¨ç®åÂÂçÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 製é å 代碼 ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656, 668 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646, 669, 670 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627, 667 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIDEN 671 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 HTP-330.book Page 28 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 29 ChH ä¸Âæ æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ 人åÂÂç¶Â常é¯å°Âä¸Âæ£確ä¹ÂæÂÂä½Âç¶æÂÂ系統æ éÂÂæÂÂç°常ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨èªÂçºæ¬æ©ÂæÂÂä»»ä½Âç°常ä¹ÂèÂÂï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âé²è¡Â檢æÂÂ¥ ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¯ è½æ¯堶ä»Âè£Âç½®ç¼çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡ÂãÂÂè«Âä»Â細檢æ¥堶ä»Â使ç¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè£Âç½®åÂÂéÂȌ¨è¨Âå ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæÂ¥èÂÂ以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»Âå¾Âä»Âç¡æ³Âæ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°±è¿Âæ´½ è©¢æ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾Â代çºç¶Âä¿®ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¬系統æ¯å çºåÂÂå°éÂÂéÂȍÂÂå¤Âä¾ÂæÂÂæÂÂè´使ç¡æ³Âæ£常æÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«Âå°Âé»æºÂæÂÂé Âå¾Â輸åºæÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå»ï¼Â以åÂÂ復æ£ 常çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæ Âã â¢ èÂ¥æ¯èÂÂé³æÂÂç¸éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âä¹Âä¸Â併檢æÂ¥é³æÂÂæÂÂæ¾è£Âç½®çÂÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂ詳細è³Âè¨Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±è£Âç½®çÂÂæÂÂä½Â說æÂÂã ä¸Âè¬ Ã¥ÂÂ顠解決辦泠é»æºÂç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂçªÂç¶é 橠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¯è½顯示 ä¸Âé¯誤è¨Âæ¯＠ã â¢ æÂ¥éÂÂæ¬æ©Âé»æºÂï¼ÂçÂÂå¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 確å®Â主æ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂç·ÂæÂÂç¡é¬Âè«çÂÂæ 形ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂé¬Âè«ï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂé æÂÂ系統èªåÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã â¢ 檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨é£æÂ¥æ¯å¦æ£確ã â¢ è«Â確å®ÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³å¨åÂÂæ¯å¦æÂÂ足夠çÂÂéÂÂ風空éÂÂã â¢ 確å®Â主é»æºÂçÂÂé»å£Â確實é©ç¨æ¼æÂŒÂÂæ©Â種ã â¢ 試èÂÂéÂÂä½Âé³éÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂä»Âç¡æ³Â解決åÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¬æ©ÂæÂÂè³æÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂèÂÂæÂ¥åÂÂç¶Âä¿®ã é¸æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂè½å¾Âï¼Âæ²Âæ é³æÂÂ輸åºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ£使ç¨å¤Âé¨輸堥ï¼Âè«Â確å®Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æ¯å¦æ£確 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥éÂÂ屬è£Âç½® ï¼ ã â¢ 調é«Âé³éÂÂã â¢ æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç MUTE 以éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé³åÂÂè½ã ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¡ æ³Â輸åºè²é³ã â¢ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 21 é Âç è²éÂÂä½ÂæºÂè¨Âå®Âå¼ 以檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨ä½ÂæºÂã â¢ 確èªÂæªé¸å AUTO ã STEREO æ VIRTUAL 模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 16 é Âç 以ç°ç¹Âé³æÂÂèÂÂè½ ï¼Âã â¢ æ£確å°æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±æÂ¥ç·Âï¼ ã ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨é²è¡Âæ æ§ã â¢ æ´æÂÂé»池ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 14 é Âç è£Âå ¥éÂÂæ§å¨é»池＠ã â¢ è«Âå¨ 7 m å §çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以 30 ð çÂÂè§Â度å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂä½ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 14 é Âç 使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ ï¼ ã â¢ 移é¤éÂÂç¤Âç©æÂÂå¾Âå ¶ä»Âä½Âç½®æÂÂä½Âã â¢ é¿å ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§æÂÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂå°é½å Âç´å°Âã â¢ èÂ¥è¦ÂæÂÂä½Âå ¶ä»Âé£æÂ¥è³æ¾¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ç CONTROL OUT æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âå ÂéÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Â確å®Âå·²æÂ¥ä¸Âæ§å¶ é£æÂ¥ç·ÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ軸é»ç·ÂæÂÂè³å°Âä¸ÂçµÂçÂÂé¡Âæ¯Âé³æÂÂé£æÂ¥ç·Âã ï¼Â第 25 é Â＠⢠è¥使ç¨ SR é£æÂ¥ç·Âé£æÂ¥æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³èÂÂå ÂéÂÂé»漿顯示å¨ï¼Âè«Â檢æÂ¥æ¯å¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»漿顯示å¨é»溠ãÂÂè«Âå°Âé æ§å¨å°ÂæºÂé»漿顯示å¨ï¼Âå³å¯æÂÂæ§æÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ã â¢ è«Â確宠CONTROL IN æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæª誤æÂÂ堥任ä½Âç©é«Âã HTP-330.book Page 29 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 30 ChH 調諧å¨ é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ è©Âå½Â表 ç± Dolby Laboratories æÂÂæ¬Â製é ã ãÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âã ã ã Dolby ãÂÂã ã Pro Logic ã èÂÂé D æ¨ÂèªÂæ¯ Dolby Laboratories çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ樠ã "DTS" å "DTS Digital Surround" çºæ¸碼影é¢系統堬å¸ (DTS, Inc.) çÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã åÂÂ顠解決辦泠æ¶è½éÂȌ°廣æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ顯 çÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ è«Âæ¥丠AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± æ¥締ï¼Â並å 以調æ´æ¹åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Â以å¾Âå°æÂÂä½³çÂÂæÂ¥æ¶æÂÂæÂÂãÂÂæ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦ å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸Âæ¢Âå §é¨æÂÂå¤Âé¨ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締＠ã â¢ å®Â堨伸å±Âé FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天ç·Âï¼Â調æ´æÂÂä½³æÂ¥æ¶çÂÂä½Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âåºå®Âæ¼çÂÂä¸ÂãÂÂæ¨ä¹Âå¯以å¦å¤ÂæÂ¥ä¸ÂçµÂå¤Âé¨ FM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂ񇪪 23 é Âç é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締ï¼Âã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂå ¶ä»Âå¯è½é æÂÂéÂÂè¨ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°Â堶移走ã â¢ 調諧éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âé©ç¨æ¼æ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂ家æÂÂå°åÂÂãÂÂèÂ¥è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ調諧éÂÂéÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé± 第 20 é Âç æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂéÂÂé ã èªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½ç¡æ³ÂæÂ¥æ¶ å°æÂÂäºÂéÂȌ°ã â¢ éÂȌ°è¨ÂèÂÂ微弱ãÂÂèªåÂÂ調諧åÂÂè½å è½åµ測å°è¨ÂèÂÂç¼å°Âè¯好çÂÂç¡ç·ÂéÂȌ°ãÂÂèÂ¥è¦Âç²å¾Âæ´å éÂÂæÂÂçÂÂ調諧梠件ï¼Âå¯æÂ¥ä¸Âä¸ÂçµÂ室å¤Â天ç·Âã è¨Âæ¯ 說æ 2CH ONLY ⢠æÂÂä½Âå é©ç¨æ¼éÂÂè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂï¼Âå ç®åÂÂä¾ÂæºÂçºå¤Âè²éÂÂä¾ÂæºÂèÂÂç¡æ³Âé²è¡Âã 96K ⢠å ä¾ÂæºÂçº 96 kHz æ¸ä½Â使æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°ç¦Âæ¢ã MUTING ⢠ç±æ¼é³æÂÂ被éÂÂé³ï¼Âå æ¤使ç¨æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°éÂÂå¶ ï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂ丠MUTE ï¼Âã EXIT ⢠æ¤è¨Âæ¯æÂÂå¨é¸å®éÂÂç½®ä¸Â段æÂÂéÂÂå¾ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåºæÂÂåºç¾ã NOISY ⢠å èÂÂæ¯éÂÂé³太é«ÂèÂÂç¡æ³Âé Âå©å®Âæ MCACC è¨Âå®Âã ERR MIC â¢ å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æªå°Â麥å Â風æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ£確èÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã ERR SP â¢ å¨ MCACC è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå æªå°ÂæÂÂè²å¨æÂ¥ä¸ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ£確èÂÂç¼çÂÂé¯誤ã EEP ERROR ⢠ç¶Âä¿®äºÂå®Âè«Â洽詢æ¨çÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã NO SPTYP ⢠試èÂÂéÂÂéÂÂ系統é»æºÂç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂæ©ÂãÂÂèÂ¥ä»Âç¼çÂÂé¯誤ï¼Âè«Âæ´½å ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂã Dolby Digital ç± Dolby 實é©Â室æÂÂç Âç¼åºçÂÂ夠è²éÂÂé³æÂÂ編碼系統ï¼Âè PCM 編碼ç¸è¼Âä¸Âï¼Âå¯å¨å Âç¢Âä¸Âå² Ã¥ÂÂæ´å¤Âé³æÂÂã DolbyPro Logic II ç± Dolby 實é©Â室æÂÂç Âç¼çÂÂç©é£ 解碼ç§ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¯å°Âä»»ä½ÂäºÂè²é çÂÂä¾ÂæºÂé³æÂÂï¼Â妠CD Ã¥ÂÂé»è¦Â廣 æÂÂï¼Â延伸è³äºÂè²éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âå·¦î¿ä¸Âç½®î¿å³î¿左ç°ç¹Âî¿å³ ç°ç¹Âï¼Âï¼Âç¢çÂÂç°ç¹ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã DTS ç± DTS æÂÂç Âç¼åºçÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂé³ æÂÂ編碼系統ï¼ÂèÂÂèÂÂè¡Â碼調讠編碼ç¸è¼Âä¸Âï¼Âå¯å¨å Âç¢Âä¸Âå² Ã¥ÂÂæ´å¤Âé³æÂÂã HTP-330.book Page 30 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
å ¶ä»Âè³Â訠09 31 ChH ä¸Âæ è¦Âæ ¼ SX-SW330 é³æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶éÂÂä½Âé³ â¢ æ´大å¨é¨å RMS Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂ輸åº＠åÂÂç½®ãÂÂä¸Âç½®ãÂÂç°繠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . æ¯Âè²é 100 W ï¼ 1 kHz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 4 ⦠＠éÂÂä½Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ï¼ 100 Hz ï¼ 10 % T.H.D. ï¼ 4 ⦠＠⢠FM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz è³ 108 MHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 ⦠＠ä¸Â平衡张⢠AM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥Âʊȴ 9 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz è³ 1602 kHz 以 10 kHz éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz è³ 1700 kHz 天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 迴路天締⢠éÂÂä½Âé³é¨å é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ä½Âé³åÂÂå°Âè½å°å 系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå é¡Âå®ÂæÂÂé» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz è³ 1.0 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W ⢠堶仠é»æºÂéÂÂæ± . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 220 V è³ 240 V ï¼ 50 Hz/60 Hz èÂÂéÂȎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W å¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ ÂèÂÂéÂȎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W 尺寸 . . . 200 mm ï¼Â寬＠x 375 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x 428 mm ï¼Â深＠éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg ⢠é Â件 éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 顯示è£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AA/R6 ä¹¾é»池ï¼Â以便æÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæ§å¨＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Ã¥ÂÂ軸é»締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 顯示é£æ¥締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AM 迴路天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 FM ç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂ天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 麥å Â風 ï¼Âä¾Âèªå MCACC è¨Â置＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 é»æºÂç· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Â大＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 å¢Âå¡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 æ¾ÂÂä½Â說æ S-ST330 æÂÂè²å¨系統 ï¼Âå 置 æÂÂè²å¨ x2 ã ç°ç¹Âæ è²å¨ x2 ãÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ x2 ＠⢠åÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹ÂæÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼Âæ¸æ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â＠系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå é¡Âå®ÂæÂÂé» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W 尺寸 . . . .100 mm ï¼Â寬＠x 100 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x 102.5 mm ï¼Â深＠éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ é³箱 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . å°ÂéÂÂå¼Âæ¸æ¶å ï¼Âé²ç£Â＠系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm ï¼Âå®åÂÂ系統 æÂÂè²å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂå é¡Âå®ÂæÂÂé» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz è³ 20 kHz æÂÂ大輸堥åÂÂç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W 尺寸 . . . .100 mm ï¼Â寬＠x 100 mm ï¼Âé«Âï¼ x 102.5 mm ï¼Â深＠éÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg ⢠é Â件 æÂÂè²å¨é£æ¥締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Âå°Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 æ¯æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 èº絲 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 çºÂç¹Â管 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Ã¥ÂÂ註 ⢠å ç¢åÂÂæ¹è¯ï¼Âè¦Âæ ¼èÂÂè¨Âè¨Âå¦ÂæÂÂè®Âæ´ï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Âå¦è¡ÂéÂÂçÂ¥ã HTP-330.book Page 31 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM
<ARE7636-A> Pu blished by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2007 Pioneer Corporation . All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Printed in China HTP-330.book Page 32 Tuesday, March 27, 2007 2:32 PM